Siemens MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
Below you will find brief information for MOBY E System E600, MOBY E System E611, MOBY E System E623, MOBY E System E624, Read/Write Device SLG 70 ANT 0, Read/Write Device SLG 70 ANT 1, Read/Write Device SLG 72, Read/Write Device SLG 75 ANT 12, Read/Write Device SLG 75 ANT 30, Read/Write Antenna SLA 71. This Siemens MOBY E system manual covers configuration, installation, and service for various components, including mobile data memories (MDS), read/write devices (SLGs/SLAs), and interfaces (ASMs). It provides guidelines for mounting, EMC compliance, and troubleshooting.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
Table of Contents MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual 6GT2 397-4BA00-0EA2 Published in November, 2000 General 1 Introduction to MOBY E 2 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3 Mobile Data Memories 4 Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas 5 Interfaces 6 Accessories 7 Documentation A Error Messages B ASCII Table C Safety Guidelines ! ! ! This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: Danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct Usage ! Note the following: Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Trademarks MOBY, SIMATIC and SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner’s rights may be violated if they are used be third parties for their own purposes. Copyright Siemens AG 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG Automation & Drives Systems Engineering Postfach 23 55, D-90713 Fuerth Technical data subject to change without prior notice Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6GT2 397-4BA00-0EA2 MOBY E Table of Contents 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2 Introduction to MOBY E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 Basic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Period of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM and User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-3 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3.2 Field Data of MDS, SLG and SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3.3 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of the Metal-Free Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of Metallic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 3-17 3-24 3-29 3-32 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 EMC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoiding Interference Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Rules on EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-40 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-47 3-49 3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 Cable and Plug Connector Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug Connector Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 3-55 3-57 3-60 3-65 Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4.3 MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4.4 MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 4.5 MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 i Table of Contents 5 6 7 ii Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2 SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.3 SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.4 SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 5.5 SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 5.6 SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 5.7 SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6-3 6-8 6-11 6.3 ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.4 ASM 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.5 ASM 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 6.6 ASM 470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 6.7 ASM 724/ASM 754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.8.4 6.8.5 6.8.6 SIM Serial Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable and Plug Connector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming the SIM Module with the 3964R Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 6-52 6-58 6-64 6-65 6-70 6-75 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 MOBY Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2 Module Rack BGT 4/BGT 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7.3 Plastic Housing for ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7.4 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 7.5 Wide-Range Plug Connector Power Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 7.6 MOBY STG E Hand-Held Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 7.7 Acquisition Station ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 7.8 Ordering Data for Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Table of Contents A Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 B Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B.1 General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 B.2 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 ASM-Related Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 400 with FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450 with FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 B-7 B-9 B-11 ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 C MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 iii Table of Contents Figures 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 iv Overview of MOBY E components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction of movement of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in static operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in dynamical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 70 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 70 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 70 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 72 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) . . . . . . . . SLG 72 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) . . . . . . . . SLG 72 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E600/E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: MDS E600/E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush installation in metal: SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting in metallic environment: SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush installation in metal: SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS in metal-free environment (example: MDS E611) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The MDS in a metallic environment (example: MDS E611) . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfering metal carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The four kinds of interference coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding via housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoidance of interference via optimal layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering the supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inductive interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface ASM 420 with TTY interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of the shield rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interruption of shielded cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple layout with ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout with ASM 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout of the ASM 470 with shield connecting element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baring of the cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage supply with power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG with extra power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-9 3-10 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-37 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-48 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-53 3-54 3-56 3-56 3-59 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Table of Contents 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 Connection cable: ASM 400/420/ES 030 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 450 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 470 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 724 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable for RS 232 PC ↔ SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E600 and its mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the spacer and mounting bracket for the MDS E611 . . . . . MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and mounting space for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a quick-release taper shaft . . . . . Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a retention shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 70 ANT 1 read/write device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space of SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D for: SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 72 read/write device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: for SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write antenna SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-60 3-60 3-61 3-61 3-62 3-62 3-63 3-64 4-4 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 5-3 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-14 5-15 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-21 5-22 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-26 5-26 v Table of Contents 5-29 5-30 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 vi Distance D: SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings on the channel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-135U/-155U central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-155U/-155H central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EG S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 420 interface with operational and indicator elements . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch strip S1 of ASM 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ASM 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection plug, ASM 450 ↔ SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable, ASM 450 ↔ SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length of baring for a 5-core cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance ASM 470 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of ASM 470 to SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470 directory in the hardware catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 724/754 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 724 and ASM 754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of ASM 724/754 to SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of ASM 724/754 with mounting holes . . . . . . . . . . . . How to mount the adapter plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a configurator for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data structure of the MOBY E MDS (MIFARE) with SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS . . Installation with one connection cable for rugged environments . . . . . . . . Installation with several connection cables on the SIM plug connector . . Installation with test cable and plug connector power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard cabling for computer/SIM and RS 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 5-27 6-4 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-19 6-20 6-23 6-25 6-25 6-28 6-31 6-34 6-35 6-35 6-36 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-51 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-59 6-59 6-60 6-62 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Table of Contents 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-60 6-61 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-65 6-66 6-67 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 Standard cabling for computer/SIM and RS 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DI/DO cabling with voltage supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space of SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space of SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program directories of “MOBY software” (version V 3.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BGT 4/8 module rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector assignment and dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment of 24 V output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY STG E hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware of the STG E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample configuration of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-62 6-63 6-65 6-68 6-68 6-69 6-69 6-70 6-72 6-73 6-74 6-74 6-75 6-77 6-78 6-79 6-79 7-3 7-6 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-14 7-16 7-20 7-24 vii Table of Contents Tables 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 viii Technical data of MOBY E (field components) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant time K and tByte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission time of ID number MDS E6xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from MDS to MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from SLG/SLA to SLG/SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction in % of the field data by metal: MDS with SLG 70 ANT 0 and SLG 75 with ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data reduction by metal in %: MDS with SLG 70 ANT 1 and SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data reduced by metal in %: MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12 . . . . . Field data reduction by metal in %: MDS with SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical resistance of the MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference sources: Origin and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Causes of coupling paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug connector . Plug connector assignment of SLA plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector assignment (9-pin, submin D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS E623/mounting space in acc. w. DIN 69873 . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview table of SLG/SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3-7 3-7 3-11 3-12 3-12 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-26 3-32 3-33 3-38 3-39 3-55 3-57 3-57 3-58 3-58 3-65 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-15 4-17 4-17 4-18 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-15 5-15 5-17 5-19 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Table of Contents 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 Technical data of the SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating modes for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of base connector X1 for ASM 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS controller and presence check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 724/754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 724/754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without the influence of metal . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from MDS to MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from SIM to SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the SIM plug connector allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage supply of SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM cable configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of MOBY software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for BGT 4/BGT 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of BGT 4/BGT 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for plastic housing for ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of plastic housing for ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the wide-range plug connector power pack . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the wide-range, plug-in, power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the STG E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for plug-in lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for power packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-19 5-21 5-24 5-24 5-25 6-2 6-5 6-6 6-9 6-16 6-17 6-21 6-22 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-29 6-32 6-32 6-40 6-41 6-47 6-48 6-56 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-61 6-61 6-65 6-65 6-70 6-70 6-75 6-75 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-9 7-9 7-12 7-13 7-17 7-17 7-21 7-22 7-25 7-26 7-26 ix Table of Contents 7-17 7-18 A-1 A-2 A-3 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 x Ordering data for MDS mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for adapter floor plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for programming guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 7-27 A-1 A-2 A-2 B-3 B-7 B-9 B-11 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 1 General This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and configure your Moby E system. It covers the guidelines on configuration and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual components. MOBY hotline A MOBY hotline has been set up for optimum customer service to MOBY customers. We are available under the following telephone numbers from 8:30 AM to 11:30 AM and from 1:00 PM to 4:00 PM Mondays through Fridays: ++49 ++49 ++49 ++49 911/750-2859 911/750-2861 911/750-4684 911/750-4659 Our hotline is not available on the Friday or Monday prior to or following legal holidays. Of course, you can also fax us your questions or send them via Internet. Fax: ++49 911/750-2800 or 750-2960 e-mail-address: [email protected] Internet General news on Moby E or an overview of our other identification systems are available on the Internet under the following address. http://www.ad.siemens.de/moby e-mail In addition, you can send us your special questions on products, Siemens representatives in your area, customer-related requirements and so on at the following e-mail address: [email protected] MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 1-1 General 1-2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 2 Introduction to MOBY E MOBY E is an RF identification system with low-cost EEPROM data storage for optimization of material handling and production processes for the lowend and medium-range performance level. This powerful system offers highspeed data transmission between data memories (i.e., MDSs) and read/write devices (i.e., SLGs). Principal application areas MOBY E is primarily used when object identification must be inductive (i.e., without contact), reliable and fast and production and manufacturing parameters must be carried on the object. Storage, logistics, and distribution Merchandise distribution Product identification Container identification Assembly lines Tool identification Technical data of MOBY E Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY E (field components) Storage capacity 752 bytes for use as desired Memory type EEPROM Data organization Address-oriented Protection rating IP 65 to IP 68 Operating temperature -25° to +125° C Data transmission speed (SLG - MDS) 2.55 msec/byte read-accesses 2.8 msec/byte write-accesses Read/write distance 0 to 100 mm Can be connected to SIMATIC S5/S7, PCs, computers, PLCs of other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 2-1 Introduction to MOBY E Overview of MOBY E components MDS: (mobile data memory) SLA: (read/write antenna) SLG: (read/write device) SIM: (serial interface module) ASM: (interface module) STG E: (service and test device) ASM 400 for SIMATIC 115U ASM 410 for SIMATIC 90U ASM 724 for connection to: PC 135U 95U 155U/H with FB 250/230 100U/H Controller of other manufacturer Computer ET 100 ET 200 ASM 450 for PROFIBUS-DPconnection with FB/FC for SIMATIC S5/S7 ASM 470 for SIMATIC S7-300 with FC 47 PC SIMs operated directly on the serial Interface of the PC ET 200M SINUMERIK via serial Interface ASM 754 for PROFIBUS-DP/V1connection with FC 45 for SIMATIC S7 RS 232 / RS 422 Internal system interface/max. cable length of 1000 m SLG 70 ANT 0 SLG 75 ANT 12 SLG 75 ANT 30 SLA 71 SLG 70 ANT 1 SLG 72 SIM 72 SIM 70 ANT 0 SIM 70 ANT 1 Inductive power/data transmission (13.56 MHz) S MOBY E MDS E600 S MOBY E MDS E611 MDS E600 752 Byte EEPROM ISO-Card MDS E611 752 Byte EEPROM EPOXY-Card MOBY E MDS E623 752 Byte EEPROM Pill Figure 2-1 2-2 MDS E624 752 Byte EEPROM Button Overview of MOBY E components MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3 3-1 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1 Basic Requirements ! Warning Do not make changes to the devices. Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE and the manufacturer’s warranty. To choose the correct MOBY E components, apply the following criteria to your particular application. Transmission distance (i.e., read/write distance) The amount of data to be transferred Metal-free spaces for MDS and SLG/SLA Static of dynamic transmission of the data Speed for dynamic transmission Tolerances of the tracking Environmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical effects, and so on) Maximum write frequency per MDS 3-2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.1 Transmission Window The read/write device (i.e., SLG/SLA) generates an inductive alternating field. The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG/SLA and decreases in strength the further away from the SLG/SLA it moves. Distribution of the field depends on the layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG/SLA and the MDS. MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved at a distance of Sg from the SLG/SLA. The figure below shows the transmission window between the MDS and the SLG/SLA. Ld Transmission window ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ Sa Sg MDS ANT 1 View of the side ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠ L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa,min) 1 PI View of the top MDS 1 At Sa, min the transmission window may increase. Sa: Operating distance (between MDS and SLG/SLA) Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the SLG/SLA and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under normal conditions.) L: Length of a transmission window for vertical direction of movement of the MDS The length Ld is valid for the calculation. For Sa,min, the field length increases from Ld to L. PI: Point of intersection of the symmetry axes of the MDS Figure 3-1 Transmission window MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines The active field to the MDS is a circle. Cf. view of top. The MDS can be processed as soon as the point of intersection (IP) of the MDS enters the circle of the transmission window. If an MDS E600 or E611 enters the transmission field diagonally (hatched portion in figure 3-1), the length of the field is reduced by approx. 15 percent. The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area becomes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg. Direction of movement of the MDS ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ The MDS and the SLG/SLA do not have a polarization axis (i.e., the MDS can come from any direction, assume any position and cross the transmission window). The active area is shown below (i.e., for vertical, horizontal and diagonal operation). L ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ B or B Figure 3-2 or ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÏÏÏÏ B L L Direction of movement of the MDS Working in static operation When static operation is used, the MDS can be processed into the area of the limit distance (i.e., Sg). The MDS must be positioned exactly over the SLG/ SLA as shown below. ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠŠ MDS Transmission window Sg ANT 1 Figure 3-3 3-4 Working in static operation MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Working in dynamic operation Transmission window ŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠ ŠŠŠŠŠ JP MDS View of top JP MDS Figure 3-4 Width of the transmission window Working in dynamical operation The following approximation formula applies to practical applications: B 0.4 L B: Width of the transmission window L: Length of the transmission window The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the tolerance of mechanical tracking. When B is maintained, the formula can be used without restriction for the transmit period. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-5 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the transmission window of an SLG/SLA. During this time, the SLG/SLA can exchange data with the MDS. The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below. TV L 0.8[m] VMDS ms tV: Transmit period of the MDS L: Length of the transmission window VMDS: Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation 0.8: Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and production tolerances. During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude communication with the MDS. During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the transmit period or vice versa. General formula: t V tK 3-6 tV : Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG/SLA tK: Communication time between MDS and ASM MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS is asynchronous with a transmission speed of 19200 baud. General formula: t K Kt Byte n Calculation of the maximum amount of user data: n max t V-K t Byte tK: Communication time between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS tV: Transmit period n: Amount of user data in bytes To achieve optimal performance, “n” may not be set to more than 160. nmax: Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation tbyte: Transmission time for 1 byte (cf. table 3-1) K: Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It contains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time required for command transmission (cf. table 3-1). Table 3-1 Constant time K and tByte K [msec] tByte B t [msec] Operating Mode 35 2,55 Read; normal operation 51 2,8 Write; normal operation This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of several subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand. The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When transmission is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the ASM continues the command automatically. Table 3-2 Transmission time of ID number MDS E6xx ID Number MDS E6xx MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Size of ID No. 4 bytes Read ID No. 20 msec. 3-7 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the following factors. Cycle time, token rotation time and type of programmable controller Software used (FB 41, FB 47, FC 44, FC 45, FC 47, FB 240, FB 250) Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three steps. a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the ASM. b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG/SLA. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write command are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. See applicable documentation for the exact communication times between ASM and user. 3-8 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.5 Sample Calculation The customer application A conveyor system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of VMDS = 0.75 m/sec. The direction of movement is vertical. The following MOBY E components were selected. ASM 400 (with FB 250) SLG 70 ANT 1 MDS E600 Task: a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant. b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to the programmer. For technical data of the components, see the tables in chapter 3.2 (“field data of MDS, SLG and SLA”). Tolerance of the height allowance of the pallet Direction of movement MDS H 0 < H < Sa 0 < H < 50 mm SLG (View of the side) Figure 3-5 Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-9 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet Direction of movement of the MDS MDS Middle line of the MDS and SLG ANT1 Tolerance range of the side allowance B= Witdh of the transmission window in dynamic operation B Figure 3-6 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet Minimum distance between SLG/SLA and SLG/SLA See table 3-5 for this value. Minimum distance between MDS and MDS See table 3-4 for this value. Maximum number of bytes t v L * 0.8 0.06m * 0.8 0.064 sec 64msec V MDS 0.75msec For normal operating mode, see table 3-1 for the values of K and tbyte. Calculation of nmax Read: tv K 64msec 35msec 11.37 n 11bytes max t Byte 2.55msec Write: tv K 64msec 51msec 4.64 n 4bytes max t Byte 2.8msec Up to 11 bytes can be read or 4 bytes can be written when the MDS passes by. 3-10 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.2 Field Data of MDS, SLG and SLA The table below shows the field data of all MOBY E MDS, SLG and SLA components. This makes selecting an MDS and an SLG/SLA particularly easy. The technical data represent average data and are valid for an ambient temperature of 0° to 50° C, a supply voltage of 22 V to 27 V DC, and metal-free surroundings. Tolerances of 20% are permitted for production conditions and temperature fluctuations. Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range from 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized for the SLG/SLA, and/or the entire temperature range is utilized for MDS and SLG/SLA. Table 3-3 Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233 MDS E624 SLG/SLA Length of the transmission window in mm (L) SLG 70 ANT 0 (Ld) --- --- 4 12 SLG 70 ANT 1 (Ld) 605 805 --- 38 SLA 71 (Ld) 605 805 --- 38 SLG 72 (Lx)2 (Ly)2 755 505 905 605 --- 60 40 SLG 75 ANT 12 (Ld) --- --- 8 --- SLG 75 ANT 30 (Ld) --- --- --- 14 Width of the transmission window in mm (W) SLG 70 ANT 0 --- --- 24 5 (12)1 SLG 70 ANT 1 24 32 --- 15 (38)1 SLA 71 24 32 --- 15 (38)1 30 20 36 24 --- 24 16 SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 4 --- SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 7 SLG 72 (Bx)2 (By)2 Working distance in mm (Sa) SLG 70 ANT 0 --- --- 0 to 6 0 to 8 SLG 70 ANT 1 0 to 50 20 to 70 --- 0 to 25 SLA 71 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25 SLG 72 0 to 50 20 to 70 --- 0 to 30 SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 0 to 4 --- SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 0 to 18 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-11 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-3 Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233 MDS E624 SLG/SLA Limit distance in mm (Sg) SLG 70 ANT 0 --- --- 6 15 SLG 70 ANT 1 70 100 --- 40 SLA 71 70 100 --- 40 SLG 72 70 100 --- 40 SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 5 --- SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 24 1 2 3 4 5 The width (W) contained in parentheses only applies to static MDS operation. See also figure 5-14 for field geometry. MDS E623 together with SLG 70 ANT 0 or SLG 75 ANT 12 only in static operation A maximum average deviation of ±2 mm (without affecting the field data) is permitted in static operation. Reduced by approx. 15% when the MDS enters the transmission window diagonally. See also figure 3-1. Table 3-4 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E623 MDS E624 SLG 70 with ANT 0 --- --- > 30 mm > 50 mm SLG 70 with ANT 1 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SLA 71 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SLG 72 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- > 20 mm --- SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- > 60 mm Table 3-5 Minimum distance from SLG/SLA to SLG/SLA SLG 70 ANT 0 SLG 70 ANT 1 SLA 71 SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 12 SLG 75 ANT 30 SLG 70 ANT 0 > 200 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm --- --- SLG 70 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- --- SLA 71 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- --- SLG 72 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- --- SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- --- --- > 80 mm --- SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- --- --- > 125 mm Note Adherence to the values specified in table 3-5 is essential. There is a danger of the influence of inductive fields if the values are underranged. This would increase the time for data transmission incalculably or a command would be terminated with errors. 3-12 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.3 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data The curves shown here will simplify selection of MOBY E MDS and SLG components for dynamic operation. Information from the table in chapter 3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves apply to vertical operation with a single length of the transmission window (Ld). V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E600 Read MDS E600 0 0 Figure 3-7 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of bytes (n) SLG 70 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E600 V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.3 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E611 Read MDS E611 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-8 SLG 70 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E611 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-13 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E624 Read MDS E624 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-9 SLG 70 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E624 V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E600 Read MDS E600 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-10 3-14 SLG 72 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E611 Read MDS E611 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-11 SLG 72 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E624 Read MDS E624 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of bytes (n) Figure 3-12 SLG 72 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-15 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4 Installation Guidelines The MDS, SLG and SLA are devices which work with induction. Every type of metal, particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of these devices influences their field geometry. To ensure that the field data described in chapter 3.2 retain their validity, several points must be adhered to when configuring and installing the devices. Minimum distance between two read/write devices or read/write antennas. (See table 3-5 and chapter 5.) Minimum distance between two adjacent data memories. (See table 3-4 and chapter 4.) Metal-free area with flush installation of SLG/SLA and MDS in metal Installation of several SLGs/SLAs in metal frames or carriers The next few chapters describe how installation in metallic surroundings affects the identification system. 3-16 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.1 Definition of the Metal-Free Area Metal-free space for MDS Do not mount the MDS directly on metal (exception: MDS E623). Mounting the MDS directly on metal will interrupt all its functions. The following figures show the minimum distance of the MDS to metal. Metal Data memory Non-metal h ≥ 20 mm Figure 3-13 Mounting on metal: MDS E600/E611 b Data memory a h Metal Non-metal Standard values Figure 3-14 a ≥ 20 mm b ≥ 20 mm h ≥ 20 mm Flush mounting in metal: MDS E600/E611 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-17 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Mounting on Metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CD00 MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted directly on metal. Figure 3-15 Mounting on metal: MDS E623 Flush mounting in Metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CD00 MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted flush in metal. Figure 3-16 3-18 Metal-free space for MDS E623 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CE00 Non-metal MDS E624 MOBY E h > 20 mm Figure 3-17 Mounting on metal: MDS E624 Data memory Metal SIEMENS a > 20 mm 6GT2 300-0CE00 Non-metal MDS E624 MOBY E h > 20 mm Figure 3-18 Flush mounting in metal: MDS E624 Underranging the standard values (i.e., a, b and h) will reduce the field data considerably. The MDS may be mounted with metal screws (i.e., M4 countersunk screws). This has no substantial effect on the range. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-19 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Metal-free space for SLG/SLA When mounting the SLG/SLA, remember that metal in the vicinity of the antennas may affect the field data. Typical distances to metal are shown in the drawings below. SLG 70 ANT 0 The cylinder-shaped ANT 0 antenna of the SLG 70 can be installed in metal with a minimum distance of 10 mm as shown in the following drawing. The field data are not affected. 10 10 ANT 0 Figure 3-19 The ANT 1 antenna can be mounted as shown in the following drawings. Remember that the field size may be reduced. See chapter 3.4.2. SLG 70 ANT 1 20 SLG 70 ANT 1 Flush installation in metal: SLG 70 ANT 0 Metal Metal Non-metal SLG 70 ANT 1 Metal Metal SLG 70 ANT 1 Metal 20 40 Metal Non-metal Figure 3-20 3-20 Mounting in metallic environment: SLG 70 ANT 1 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLG 72 Since the height of the housing of the SLG 72 with integrated antenna provides a sufficient distance to the metallic base, the device can be mounted directly on metal. When flush mounting is used, remember to maintain the specified distance to metal on the sides. Metal h h = Physical height of the SLG = 40 mm Figure 3-21 Mounting on metal: SLG 72 b b a a Metal a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm Figure 3-22 Flush installation in metal: SLG 72 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-21 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLG 75 ANT 12 With the SLG 75 with ANT 12, the antenna can be mounted flush in metal. This reduces the working and limit distance (see chap. 3.4.2). ANT 12 Figure 3-23 SLG 75 ANT 30 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 12 With the SLG 75 with ANT 30, the antenna can be mounted flush in metal. A distance of 20 mm must be maintained to the front of the antenna. This reduces the field data (see chap. 3.4.2). 20 20 ANT 30 Figure 3-24 3-22 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 30 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLA 71 The SLA 71 can be mounted flush in metal. Remember that field data may be reduced (see chap. 3.4.2). Metal-free area for flush mounting a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metallic base) Figure 3-25 Flush mounting in metal: SLA 71 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-23 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.2 Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window The following general points apply to the mounting of MOBY E components. The MDS may not be mounted directly on metal. (exception: MDS E623) Flush installation of the components in metal will reduce the field data. A test is recommended for critical applications. When processing in the transmission window, make sure that metal rails or similar do not cut through the transmission field since the metal rail would affect the field data. When the SLG 70 ANT 1 and SLG 72 are involved, the field remains virtually unaffected at distances to metal greater than 40 mm. When the SLG 70 ANT 0 is used, this distance is reduced to 10 mm. Using tables and graphics, this chapter shows how the field data (i.e., Sg, Sa, L, and W) are affected by metal. The values in the tables represent the reduction of field data in % as related to non-metal (i.e., 100% stands for no effect). MDS and SLG 70/SIM 70 with ANT 0 and SLG 75 with ANT 30 Table 3-6 Reduction in % of the field data by metal: MDS with SLG 70 ANT 0 and SLG 75 with ANT 30 SLG 70 SIM 70 SLG 75 No Metal [%] Mounted Flush in Metal [%] ANT 0 ANT 30 ANT 0 Metal-free 10 mm circumference; 10 mm in depth ANT 30 Metal-free 20 mm circumference; 20 mm in depth MDS without metal 100 ––– 100 ––– MDS on metal 80 ––– 80 ––– MDS flush mounted in metal 60 ––– 60 ––– MDS without metal 100 100 100 80 MDS on metal Distance: 20 mm 100 90 100 75 MDS flush mounted in metal Distance: 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 100 75 100 70 MDS MDS E623 MDS E624 3-24 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS and SLG 70/SIM 70 with ANT 1 and SLA 71 Table 3-7 Field data reduction by metal in %: MDS with SLG 70 ANT 1 and SLA 71 ANT 1/SLA 71 without Metal [%] ANT 1/SLA 71 on Metal Distance 20 mm [%] ANT 1/SLA 71 Flush in Metal Distance of 20 mm Circumference 40 mm [%] ANT 1/SLA 71 on Metal [%] MDS without metal 100 100 80 70 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 60 50 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 50 40 MDS without metal 100 100 80 70 MDS on metall Distance 20 mm 75 75 55 45 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 70 50 40 MDS without metal 100 100 80 60 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 100 100 80 60 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 80 60 60 40 SLG 70 SIM 70 SLA 71 MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-25 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12 Table 3-8 Field data reduced by metal in %: MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12 ANT 12 without Metal [%] ANT 12 Flush in Metal Distance 10 mm Circumference 10 mm [%] ANT 12 Flush Mounted in Metal [%] MDS without metal 100 85 85 MDS with metal Distance 20 mm 100 85 85 MDS flush mounted in metal Distance 20 mm/circumference 20 mm 75 75 60 Without Metal [%] On Metal [%] Flush in Metal Circumference 40 mm [%] MDS without metal 100 100 100 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 70 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 60 MDS without metal 100 100 80 MDS on metal Diatance 20 mm 80 70 70 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 60 MDS without metal 100 100 80 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 100 80 80 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 60 40 40 SLG 75 MDS MDS E623 MDS and SLG 72/SIM 72 Table 3-9 Field data reduction by metal in %: MDS with SLG 72 SLG/SIM 72 MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 3-26 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Below are figures using the SLG 70 ANT 1 with MDS E611 as an example to illustrate how metal affects the transmission window. The percentages apply to field data reduction in relation to a metal-free environment (i.e., 100%). MDS in metal-free environment MDS E611 MDS E611 100% 70% ANT 1 ANT 1 Non-metal Metal MDS E611 MDS E611 100% 80% 40 mm ANT 1 Non-metal Metal Figure 3-26 20 mm 40 mm ANT 1 20 mm Non-metal Metal MDS in metal-free environment (example: MDS E611) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-27 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS in metallic environment Metal 20 mm Metal Non-metal MDS E611 20 mm Non-metal 75% MDS E611 45% ANT 1 ANT 1 Non-metal Metal Metal 20 mm Non-metal 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm Metal 20 mm Non-metal 70% MDS E611 20 mm ANT 1 Non-metal Figure 3-27 3-28 40% MDS E611 ANT 1 Metal The MDS in a metallic environment (example: MDS E611) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects Interfering metal carriers Metal carrier Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ MDS Sa ANT 1 ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ MDS ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ANT 1 Figure 3-28 Bad A metal carrier is located over the second transmission window of the SLG. This carrier affects the entire field. Particularly the transmission window between SLG and MDS is reduced. Metal Good The transmission window is no longer affected when the MDS and the ANT 1 are mounted differently. Interfering metal carriers MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-29 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Flush installation Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Metal ANT 1 Although flush installation of MDS and SLG is generally possible, the size of the transmission window is sharply reduced. The following measures can be used to counteract reduction of the window. Metal ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Enlargement of the non-metallic spacer under the MDS and/or SLG. MDS and/or SLG are 10 to 20 mm higher than the metallic surroundings. x > 100 mm 10-20 mm The value x > 100 mm applies to the SLG 70 ANT 1. This value specifies that, at a distance of x > 100 mm, the SLG is no longer noticeably affected by the metal. ANT 1 Enlargement of non-metallic distances a and b (see figure 3-22). ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ The following rules of thumb apply. a b Figure 3-29 ANT 1 b For SLG/MDS with large limit distance (SLG 70 ANT 1/ MDS E611), enlargement of a and b has more effect than for SLG/MDS with small limit distance. Flush installation Installation of several SLGs/SLAs on metal frame or carrier 3-30 Select a and b increased with a factor of 2 to 3 a Every SLG/SLA which is mounted on metal couples part of the field on the metal carrier. When minimum distance D is maintaining and metal-free areas a and b are adhered to, there are usually no effects. However, when the location of an iron frame is particularly poor, there may be some effects. This will lengthen data transmission times or cause sporadic error messages on the interface. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Necessary actions a) Lengthen distance D between the two ANT 1s ANT 1 ANT 1 D b) Install one or more iron struts to short circuit the parasitic fields ANT 1 ANT 1 c) Install a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 mm in thickness between the ANT 1 and the iron frame. This significantly reduces parasitic coupling of the field on the carrier. Non-metallic spacer ANT 1 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 ANT 1 3-31 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.4 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories MDS E600 The MDS E600 is resistant to the substances listed in the following table. Table 3-10 Chemical resistance of the MDS E600 Substance Concentration Salt water 5% Sugar water 10% Acetic acid, hydrous solution 5% Sodium carbonate, hydrous solution 5% Ethyl alcohol, hydrous solution 60% Ethylenglycol 50% Fuel, B In acc. w. ISO 1817 Human perspiration Reference: ISO 10373/ISO 7810 3-32 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS E611/ E623/E624 Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624) Concentration Allyl choride Formic acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, liquid, anhydrous Ammonium hydroxide Ethanol Ethyl acrylate Ethylene glycol Gasoline, free of aromatic compounds Gasoline, unstripped Bezoates (Na-, Ca- and similar) Bezoic acid Benzine Benzene-sulfonic acid Benzyl chloride Borax Boric acid Bromine, liquid Bromine, gaseous, dry Bromide (K-, Na- and similar) Bromoforme Bromide water Butadiene (1, 3-) Butane, gaseous Butanol Butyric acid Carbonates (ammonia-, Na- and sim.) Chlorine, liquid Chlorine, gaseous, dry Chlorobenzene Chloride (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Chloroform Chlorophyll Chlorosulphonic acid Chlorine water (saturated solution) Chromates (K-, Na- and similar) Chromic acid Chromic sulfuric acid “Lemon acid” Cyanamide Cyanides (K-, Na- and similar) Dextrine (hydrous solution) Diethyl ether Diethylene glycol Dimethyl ether Dioxan Developer Acetic acid Fixing bath Fluorides (ammonia-, K-, Na- and sim.) Hydrofluoric acid Formaldehyde Formamide MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 50% 100% 10% 20 C 40 C 60 C 100% 100% 100% 100% Up to 50% Up to 30% 100% Up to 40% 50% 100% 3-33 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624) Concentration Gluconic acid Glycerin Glycocoll Urine Uric acid Hydroxides (ammonia-) Hydroxides (Na- and K-) Hydroxides (alkaline earth metal-) Hypochlorites (K-, Na- and similar) Iodides (K-, Na- and similar) Silicic acid Cresylol Methanol Methylene chloride Lactic acid Mineral oils Nitrates (ammonia-, K- and similar) Nitroglycerin Oxalic acid Phenol Phosphates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Phosphoric acid Propyl alcohol Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Brine Sulfur dioxide Carbon bisulphide, 100% Sulphuric acid Sulphurous acid Soap solution Sulfates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Sulfites (ammonia-, Na- and similar) Tar, free of aromatic compounds Turpentine Trichlorethlylene Hydrogen peroxide Tartaric acid 20 C 40 C 60 C 10% 40% Up to 90% 100% 100% 1% 50% 85% 25% 10% 100% 40% 30% Explanation of the symbols Resistant Somewhat resistant Not resistant 3-34 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5 EMC Guidelines 3.5.1 Foreword The EMC guidelines contain the following information. Why are the EMC guidelines necessary? What interference affects the controller from the outside? How can interference be prevented? How can interference be corrected? Which standards apply to the EMC guidelines? Examples of an interference-suppressed system setup The description is directed to “qualified personnel.” Configuration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines Skilled personnel and service engineers who install the connection cables based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when a malfunction occurs. ! Warning Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in the system or destroy either single components or the entire system. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-35 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.2 General The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with it the following characteristics. Greater concentration of components Increasing capacity of power electronics Rising switching speeds Lower current consumption of the components The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will interfere with one another. Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) is the ability of a piece of electrical or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic environment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surroundings within certain limits. EMC can be divided into three areas. Intrinsic interference immunity Resistance to internal (i.e., own) electrical interference Free interference immunity Resistance to external electromagnetic interference Degree of interference emission Interference emission and effects of the electrical environment All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device. The MOBY modules are tested for adherence to the limit values contained in the CE and BAPT guidelines. Since MOBY modules are only one of many components in a total system and the combination of various components may also create sources of interference, certain guidelines must be adhered to when setting up a system. EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system. Note The system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines, while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the complete system. All measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources later. Although the regulations of specific countries must also be adhered to, this information is not covered in the documentation. 3-36 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.3 Spreading of Interference Three components are required so that interference can affect a system. Source of interference Coupling path Potentially susceptible equipment Interference source Ex: a drive Figure 3-30 Coupling path Ex: a MOBY cable Potentially susceptible device Ex: an ASM 420 Spreading of interference If one of these components is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the source of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the susceptible device will not be affected even when strong interference is being emitted. The EMC measures affect all three components to prevent any malfunctions caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all possible measure to prevent the creation of sources of interference. Only equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a system. All interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all coils and windings. The layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible. Measures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources. The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a system. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-37 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Sources of interference It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., a very low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures. Table 3-12 Interference sources: Origin and effects Interference Source Effect on Potentially Susceptible Equipment Contactor, electronic valves l Contacts Power network malfunctions Coils Magnetic field Electric motor Collector Electrical field Winding Magnetic field Contacts Electrical field Transformer Magnetic field, power network malfunction, equalizing currents Power pack, switchedmode Circuit Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field Sender (e.g., industrial radios) Antenna Electromagnetic field Difference in grounding or reference potential Voltage difference Equalizing currents Operator Static charging Electrical discharging currents, electrical field High-voltage current cable Current flow Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field Electric welding device 3-38 Interference Origin MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Coupling paths A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling. I N T E R F E R E N C E Galvanic coupling path MOBY ASM o. SLG Capacitive coupling path MOBY ASM o. SLG Capacitive coupling path MOBY ASM o. SLG S O U R C E Emission coupling MOBY ASM o. SLG Figure 3-31 P O T E N T I A L L Y S U S C E P T I B L E D E V I C E The four kinds of interference coupling When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can act as coupling paths. Table 3-13 Causes of coupling paths Cause Coupling Path Cables and lines Incorrect or unfavorable installation Missing or incorrectly connected shields Cables spaced unfavorably Switching cabinet or SIMATIC housing h i Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line Missing or incorrect grounding Cables spaced unfavorably Modules not installed securely Poor cabinet layout MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-39 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.4 Cabinet Layout User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system includes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and correct shielding of lines. Note For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller. Shielding via housing Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the induced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e., with a high degree of conductivity). Figure 3-32 Shielding via housing When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity. This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires. 3-40 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Avoiding interference via optimal layout Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabinet, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power components (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be installed separately (i.e., separated by space) from the controller components (e.g., relay controllers and SIMATIC S5). The following basic principles apply. 1. The effect of interference decreases the greater the distance between interference source and potentially susceptible equipment. 2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates. 3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm. PS CPU/EU Shielding plate Drive Figure 3-33 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-41 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Filtering the supply voltage External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installation is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be installed directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are filtered out early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet. Right Wrong Power filter Is Power filter Is IS = Interference current Figure 3-34 3-42 Filtering the supply voltage MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.5 Avoiding Interference Sources Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a frequent cause of interference in a system. Interference suppression of inductivities Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this interference must be suppressed with one of the following circuits. When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even with small relays. Several kV can be created on 220 V coils. By using freewheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage is prevented and, with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the coil lines. Relay coils Valves Contactors Brakes Figure 3-35 Inductive interference Note All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Valves and motor brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet must be subjected to a special test. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-43 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.6 Equipotential Bonding Differing system part layouts and differing voltage levels can cause differences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts are connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals. This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative. The cross section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough (i.e., at least 10 mm2). The space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line must be kept as small as possible (i.e., antenna effect). A fine-wire line must be used (i.e., better conduction of high frequencies). When connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be combined. Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 Power pack EU wrong EU EU PLC wrong Drive Figure 3-36 Equipotential bonding The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of interference caused by fluctuations in potential. Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch voltages when devices malfunction. 3-44 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.7 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY L+ R R 230 V ASM 24 V R R L- SLG Ungrounded power pack Interface to the computer or PC Ground fault monitoring deviceWhen a voltage asymmetry against protective ground occurs on lines L+ or L-, the current circuit is interrupted. Figure 3-37 To connect a grounded computer or PC, the connection must contain a galvanic coupling (e.g., optocoupler). Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring SIMATIC with ASM 400 The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V (i.e., signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400, the 0 V signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the SIMATIC. The connection between the ASM 400 (SIMATIC) and the SLG is equipotentially bonded (i.e., RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation). A direct setup with grounding fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as described in the SIMATIC manual if grounding fault monitoring is necessary. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-45 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SIMATIC AG 100U with ASM 410 ASM 410 C P U PLC 100U SLG Galvanic isolation 230V 24V Figure 3-38 Grounding fault monitoring SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU. A layout with grounding fault monitoring is simple. Serial interface ASM 420 The ASM 420 is available with RS 422, V.24 and TTY interfaces. A layout with grounding fault monitoring requires galvanic isolation (i.e., a layout with the TTY interface). ASM 420 - TTY C P U PLC 100U SLG Galvanic isolation 230V 24V Figure 3-39 3-46 Grounding fault monitoring Serial interface ASM 420 with TTY interface MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.8 Shielding the Cables To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded. The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However, this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interference-prone environment. In most cases, the use of braided shields is sufficient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the shielding action. Note A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no shielding effect. The following principles apply. For analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on the receiver side. For digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the housing. Since interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e., > 10 kHz), connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large surface. Figure 3-40 Shielding of the cables The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet over a large surface (i.e., good conductivity) and must be located as close to the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (highfrequency clamp) to the shield rail or be bound with cable binders. The location must have good conductivity. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-47 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Cable binder Remove paint Figure 3-41 Connection of the shield rail The shield bar must be connected with the protective ground (PE) bar. When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to the plug connector housing. Only suitable plug connectors may be used. ÔÔÔÔ ÖÖÖ ÔÔÔÔ ÖÖÖ ÖÖÖ Figure 3-42 Shield turned up backwards by 180° and connected with the plug connector housing Rubber sleeve Interruption of shielded cables When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used, the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interruption. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection. 3-48 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.9 Basic Rules on EMC Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) can often be ensured by following a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are listed below. Shielding via housing Protect the programmable controller from external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be included in the grounding connection. Shield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable controller with separator plates. Use metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines. Large-surface grounding connection Connect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large surface. Provide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and the central grounding point. Remember to connect the shield bar to ground (i.e., a large-area connection of the shield bar to ground must be provided). Aluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections. Planning the cabling Organize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately. Always install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts or bundles. Introduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible, at one level. Install the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible. Twist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conductors. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-49 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Shielding the lines Shield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides. Shield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the drive). Always apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield bar over a large surface, and secure these with clamps. Continue the applied shield without interruption to the module. Use braided shields and not foil shields. Power supply and signal filter Only use power supply filters with metal housings. Connect the filter housing (i.e., connection must be low HF resistant and over a large surface) to cabinet ground. Never secure the filter housing to painted surfaces. Secure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interference source. 3-50 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding With MOBY the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an RS 422 interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and SLG may be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the same as that of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to shielding of all data cables. The following figure shows the primary points required for a secure layout. Grounding bar for all shielded cables. It must be located as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet. The bar must be grounded to the cabinet over a large surface and use short connections. Ï Additional SLGs Ï The cable shield is applied to the SLG plug connector on the appropriate shield pin. The cable shield of the SLG may not be applied to a grounded point (i.e., no grounding clamp). 230V 24V Additional power consumers Each cabinet is centrally grounded. The voltage supply of the SLGs should be provided by the 2-pole plug connector on the ASM. The ASM is equipped with electrical fuses and a filter circuit against interference peaks. This filters out interference peaks and frequencies which may be caused by “additional power consumers.” Figure 3-43 The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be bared directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp is used for the connection of the cable shield to the grounding bar. This will divert interference voltages of + 2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful shield connection is particularly important for long cables or interference-prone industrial environments. Simple layout with ASM 400 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-51 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Layout with ASM 420 Standard MOBY housing 230 V Grounding bar for all shielded cables. It must be located as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet. The bar must be grounded to the cabinet over a large surface and use short connections. 24 V Computer or PC ASM 420 See figure (ASM 400) The cable shield is applied to the SLG plug connector on the appropriate shield pin. The cable shield of the SLG may not be applied to a grounded point (i.e., no grounding clamp). Voltage for ASM and SLG is supplied from the computer/PC. Figure 3-44 Layout with ASM 420 Standard MOBY housing 3-52 The standard MOBY housing can be used as a stand-alone housing or as a built-in housing. When used as a stand-alone housing, connection of the SLG to the standard MOBY cable is sufficient for an EMC layout. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Layout of an S7-300 with MOBY When connecting the SLG to the ASM 470, it is essential that a shield connection terminal be used for the cable shield. Shield connection terminals and holders are standard components of the S7-300 product family. Holder Shield connection terminal Cable to SLG 1 Figure 3-45 Cabling for ASM 470 Cable to SLG 2 Layout of the ASM 470 with shield connecting element To ensure EMC, an S7-300 shield connecting element must be used for the SLG cable. See figure 3-45. The shield of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in figure 3-46. 30 170 Specifications in mm Figure 3-46 Baring of the cable shield MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-53 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Voltage supply of the SLG with power pack Connection of the SLG (cf. previous figure) Connection in the switching cabinet (cf. previous figure) Ï 230V Ï 24V Standard SLG cable to the ASM The mounting plate is used to connect both cable shields. This ensures continuous protection of the data lines against interference fields. Direct connection on the mounting plate with protective ground is not permitted since otherwise equalizing currents would flow over the cable shield. 220V 24V The housing of the power pack is provided with total insulation. The protective conductor is omitted for connection to the power network. Figure 3-47 6GT2 090-0HA00 The cable jacket of the incoming and outgoing cables must be bared as shown. The cable shields are provided with a cable clamp on the mounting plate of the power pack. Voltage supply with power pack Connection of other modules (e.g., ASM 410) 3-54 Standard SLG cable to the SLB To divert interference which may occur on the connection cable to the SLG, proceed as described for the ASM 400. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7 Cable and Plug Connector Assignments The cable jacket of standard SLG connection cables used with MOBY is made of polyurethane (i.e., PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This ensures very good cable resistance to oils, acids, caustic solutions, hydraulic fluids and high resistance to UV. 3.7.1 Cable Configuration The cable between ASM and SLG requires six cores + shield. Four of these cores are assigned to the serial data interface. The power supply of the SLG requires two cores. The data can be transferred over distances of up to 1000 m, almost without regard to the diameter of the wire. Since voltage is present on the connection cable due to the current consumption of the SLG, permitted cable lengths are usually shorter than 1000 m. The length depends on the current consumption of the SLG and the ohmic resistance of the connection cable. The following table shows an overview of permissible cable lengths. Table 3-14 Cable configuration Conductor Cross Section in mm2 Conductor Diameter in mm 0.072 0.32 0.2 Resistance /km1 SLG 70 ANT 0/ANT 1 SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 12/ANT 30 Max. Cable Length in m (I=180 mA) UV=24V UV=30V 550 40 100 0.5 185 120 300 0.5 0.8 70 310 790 0.82 1.02 50 440 1000 1.52 1.42 24 920 1000 1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conductors. A single wire has half the resistance. 2 Use of these conductor cross sections requires crimp contacts (not included) in the SLG connection plug. Field with gray background: Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYCY, 6 x 0.25, shielded. The cable is available from Siemens under the order number 6GT2 090-0A... Grounding of the cable We recommend always applying the shield of the SLG cable to a grounding bar over a large surface. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-55 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Supplementary power pack for SLG When an additional power pack is installed in the vicinity of the SLG, the max. 1000 m cable between the ASM and SLG can always be used. Ï Note Do not connect the 24 V line (pin 2 on SLG plug connector) to the ASM. 6-core (with 24 V connection) SLG 24 V DC 90 230 V AC Ï Figure 3-48 Max. of 1000 m SLG with extra power pack The power pack shown in the drawing can be ordered from Siemens under the number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see chap. 7.4). Note With some restrictions, the power pack can be used as the main power pack for the ASM 400, ASM 420, ASM 724 or ASM 754. See figure 3-49. The maximum current of the power pack (2.2 A) may not be exceeded. ÏÏ SLG Pin allocation on socket plug connector 1, 4 2, 3 ÏÏ GND +24 Volt 24 V DC 90 230 V AC Figure 3-49 3-56 MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.2 Plug Connector Assignment SLG 70, SLG 72, SLG 75 Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector1 Table 3-15 Plug connector on the SLG 2 1 6 3 5 4 Designation Pin 1 - Receiving 2 + 24 Volt 3 Ground (0 V) 4 + Sending 5 - Sending 6 + Receiving Cable shield 1 This plug connector applies to SLG 70 ANT 0/ANT 1, SLG 72, SLG 75 ANT 12/ ANT 30 Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug connector1 Table 3-16 Pin Plug connector on the ASM 9-pin subminiature D plug connector with screw-type lock 1 Not used 2 + Sending 3 + Receiving 4 Not used 5 - Receiving 6 - Sending 7 Ground (0 V) 8 + 24 Volt (see caution note) 9 Not used Geh. 1 Desigantion Cable shield This plug connector assignment applies to: ASM 400, ASM 420 => SLG; ES 030 => SLG Note When making your own cables, remember that the “sending” signal of the SLG must be connected to the “receiving” signal of the ASM, or vice versa. ! Caution When using the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG, do not wire this pin to the ASM. Cf. table 3-16. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-57 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLA 71 Plug connector assignment of SLA plug1 Table 3-17 Plug connector on the SLA 4 5 3 8 6 7 2 1 1 1 +12 Volt 2 + Send 3 + Receive 4 Not used 5 - Receive 6 - Send 7 Not used 8 Ground (0 V) This plug connector applies to SLA 71 Plug connector assignment (9-pin, submin D)1 Table 3-18 Designation Pin 9-pin submin D plug connector with screwtype lock 1 3-58 Designation Pin 1 +12 Volt 2 + Send 3 + Receive 4 Not used 5 - Receive 6 - Send 7 Ground (0 V) 8 Not used 9 Not used This connector assignment applies to ASM 724, ASM 754 <=> SLA 71. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Installing the SLG plug connector If the SLG plug connector has to be turned in a different direction when using a prefabricated cable, proceed as shown in the drawing below to position the contact support differently. The plug connector on the SLG cannot be turned. Knurled screw for solid connections (no tools needed) Removable housing cover for easy mounting Cage-claw cable retainer Crimp contacts for use even with strong vibration1 Secure the contact support in 7 positions. 1 Hand crimp snap-on conector (Type XZC0700, order no. 932507-001) Order from: Hirschmann GmbH+Co. 72606 Nuertingen Tel: 07127/14-1479 Figure 3-50 Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-59 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.3 Connection Cables Connection cable for ASM 400/420, ES 030 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-0A... Straight plug connector: 6GT2 091-2A... ASM side SLG side 9-pin subminia2 ture D (pins, screw-type 6 locking) 3 6 1 4 5 5 3 7 8 SLG plug connector (socket) 1 2 Housing 1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire this pin to the ASM. Connection cable: ASM 400/420/ES 030 ↔ SLG Figure 3-51 Connection cable for ASM 410 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-0D..., Straight plug connector: 6GT2 091-2D... ASM side SLG side Cable with core sleeves 3 (7) White 4 (8) Brown SLG plug connector 1 (socket) 5 (9) Green 4 6 (10) Yellow 5 2 Gray 3 Pink 2 1 1 6 (Shield) 1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire this pin to the ASM. Figure 3-52 ! 3-60 Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG Caution The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the interface module and grounded on a grounding bar. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable for ASM 450 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-1C... ASM side SLG side SLG plug connector (socket) Two 5-pin round M12 plug connectors 22,5 2m1 White X1/2 18,5 X1 X2 X1/1 X1/4 1 4 5 Gray Pink X2/3 X2/1 X1/5 1 Standard length 6 Brown Green Yellow X1/3 3 2 X2/5 Figure 3-53 Connection cable for ASM 470 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-0E... Straight plug connector: 6GT2 091-2E... Connection cable: ASM 450 ↔ SLG ASM side SLG side Cable with core sleeves 4 (12) 5 (13) 6 (14) 7 (15) 8 (16) 9 (17) White Brown Green Yellow Pink Gray 6 1 SLG plug connector (socket) 4 5 2 3 (Shield) Cable shield bared Figure 3-54 Connection cable: ASM 470 ↔ SLG MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-61 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 724 6GT2 391-0B... ASM side PC side 9-pin, submin D 1 (pins, screw-type 2 lock) 3 RxD TxD TxD RxD 0V 0V 1 9-pin, submin D (socket, screw2 type lock) 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 Housing Housing l* * I in acc. with length key up to 32 m Figure 3-55 Connection cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 6GT2 391-1AH50 Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 724 ASM side SLA side 9-pin, submin D 1 (pins, screw-type 2 lock) 1 SLA plug connector M12, socket 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Pin 8 free 8 8 9 5m Figure 3-56 3-62 Connection cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Extension cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 6GT2 391-1BN25 Coupling side M12 plug connector, pin for connection cable SLA 71 6GT2 391-1AH50 SLA side 2 1 SLA plug connector M12, socket 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 25 m Figure 3-57 Extension cable ASM 724/754 ↔ SLA 71 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-63 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ SIM 6GT2 391-1DH50 Adapter 13 14 15 15-pin submin. D (socket, screwtype lock) 0.53 m PC (RS 232)side 5m SIM side Ground Ground TxD RxD RxD TxD 1 5 3 2 9-pin submin. D (socket, screwtype lock) 9 0V + 24 V Test cable for DO/DI and voltage supply (Shield) Housing Pin allocation for terminal module 1 Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 3-58 3-64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Connection for plug connector power pack (6GT2 090-0HB00) Designation + 24 V Not used DO0 Ground (0 V) DI0 DO1 DO2 Not used Ground (0 V) Ground (0 V) DPA0 DI1 GND signal ground TxD send RxD receive 1 For definition of the inputs/ outputs, see chap. 6.8.2. Connection cable for RS 232 PC SIM MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.4 Length Key The following length key can be used for all connection cables listed in chapter 3.7.3. Exceptions: Connection cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71, order no. 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71, order no. 6GT2 391-1BN25 Connection cable RS 232 PC SIM, order no. 6GT2 391-1DH50 The preferred lengths for stub lines are shown in bold type. Table 3-19 Length key Length of the Stub Line Order No. Supplement 6GT2 09.-0. ↑↑↑ 0.8 m E 8 0 1.2 m H 1 2 1.6 m H 1 6 2.0 m H 2 0 2.5 m H 2 5 2.8 m H 2 8 3.2 m H 3 2 3.6 m H 3 6 5.0 m H 5 0 8.0 m H 8 0 10.0 m N 1 0 12.0 m N 1 2 16.0 m N 1 6 20.0 m N 2 0 32.0 m N 3 2 50.0 m N 5 0 80.0 m N 8 0 120.0 m T 1 2 160.0 m T 1 6 200.0 m T 2 0 320.0 m T 3 2 500.0 m T 5 0 800.0 m T 8 0 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 3-65 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3-66 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4 4-1 Mobile Data Memories 4.1 Introduction Application area MOBY identification systems ensure that useful data accompany a product from the very beginning. Mobile data memories are attached to the product or its conveyor or its packaging unit and are written, changed and read - all without contact. All important information related to production and material flow control is included right on the product. Its sturdy design permits use in rugged environments and makes the MDS insensitive to many chemical substances. Layout and functions The primary components of the mobile data memories (i.e., MDS) include logic, antenna and EEPROM. When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read-write device/ read-write antenna (i.e., SLG/SLA), the power supply unit generates and monitors the necessary power for all switching elements. The pulse-coded information is conditioned for further processing as purely digital signals. In addition to managing the various memories, the monitoring unit takes care of data handling and the check routines. Overview Table 4-1 MDS Type Overview of MDS Memory Size Gross/Net Temperature Range (During Operation) DimenProtecsions tion (W x H x D Rating in mm) MDS E600 1024-byte EEPROM (gross) 752-byte net capacity -25° to +60° C 85x54x0.8 IP 68 MDS E611 1024-byte EEPROM (gross) 752-byte net capacity -25° to +70° C 85x54x2.5 IP 67 MDS E623 1024-byte EEPROM (gross) 752-byte net capacity -25° to +85° C 10x4.5 IP 67 MDS E624 1024-byte EEPROM (gross) 752-byte net capacity -25° to +125° C 27x4 IP 67 Definition of IP 67 – Protection against the penetration of dust (i.e., dustproof) – Total protection again accidental touch – Protection against water under certain pressure and time conditions Definition of IP 68 – Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof) – Full protection against touch – MDS can be continuously submerged in water. Contact manufacturer for requirements. 4-2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Operational requirements/ environmental requirements Table 4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS Requirement Proof of physical strength is determined by an oscillation test. MDS E600 ISO 7810, ISO 10 373 MDS E611/MDS E623/ MDS 624 EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 Test conditions: Frequency range Amplitude of the dis- 2 to 500 Hz 7.5 mm (2 to 26 Hz) placement Acceleration Test duration per axis Throughput speed 20 g (26 to 500 Hz) 20 frequency cycles 1 octave/min. Proof of physical strength is determined by continuous shock stress. Test conditions: EN 60721-3-7, Class 7M3 Acceleration 100 g Duration 6 msec Test duration per axis 500 impacts per axis Torsion and bending stress In acc. w. ISO 10 373 / ISO 7816-1 Not permitted Protection rating IP 68 in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 67 in acc. w. EN 60529 -25° to +60° C -25° C to +70° C/+85° C/+125° C -40° C to +85° C/+100° C /+150° C Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Temperature gradient over storage temperature range in acc. w. part 2-4 of DIN IEC 68 -25° to +60° C 3° C/min Temperature gradient for rapid Duration of 30 min per temperature change in acc. w. maximum part 2-14 of DIN IEC 68 Transition from one maximum to another: Approx. 10 sec, 100 cycles ! 3° C/min Duration of 30 min per maximum Transition from one maximum to another: Approx. 10 sec, 100 cycles Warning The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and may not occur continuosly. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-3 Mobile Data Memories 4.2 MDS E600 Ordering data Table 4-3 Ordering data for MDS E600 Order Number MDS E600 mobile data memory with 752-byte EEPROM Accessories: Mounting bracket Technical data 4-4 6GT2 300-0AA00 6GT2 390-0AA00 Figure 4-1 MDS E600 Table 4-4 Technical data of MDS E600 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at +40°C) 2 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200,000 Typical write cycles 1,000,000 Data retention time (at < +40° C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration ISO 10 373/ISO 7810 Torsion and bending stress ISO 10 373/ISO 7816-1 Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/mounting bracket Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 68 Physical layout Laminated PVC card, printable on one side Color Anthracite/white Material PVC Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 85.6 x 54 x 0.76 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-4 Technical data of MDS E600 Ambient temperature p Dur ng operation During operat on During transportation and storage -25° 25 to +60 +60° C -25° to +60° C Weight, approximate Field data Table 4-5 6g Field data of MDS E600 SLG 70 ANT 0 SLG 70 ANT 1 SLG 72 SLA 71 Operating distance (Sa) --- 0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm Limit distance (Sg) --- 70 mm 70 mm 70 mm Transmission window (L) --- Minimum distance from MDS to MDS --- 1 60 mm (Ld) )1 75 mm (Lx 60 mm (Ld) )1 50 mm (Ly > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm For field geometry, see also figure 5-14. The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-5 Mobile Data Memories Dimensions (in mm) Dimensional drawing MDS E600 85.6 0.2 R3 54 0.2 A A 0.76 0.08 Section A-A: Mounting bracket for MDS E600 The mounting bracket is secured to a non-metallic base with M4 countersunk screws using the holes provided. Note The mounting bracket shown here (i.e., order no. 6GT2 390-0AA00) is not suitable for the spacer shown in figure 4-7 (i.e., order no. 6GT2 190-0AA00). 33 +0.3 65 +0.5 4.5 110 +0.5 5 +0.5 100 +0.3 Note When MDS E600 is mounted on metal, mounting bracket 6GT2190-0AB00 can also be used but only together with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 (for dimensions, see figure 4-7). Figure 4-2 4-6 MDS E600 and its mounting bracket MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Metal Data memory Non-metal 20 mm Flush mounting in metal b Data memory a h Metal Non-metal Standard values: Figure 4-3 a ≥ 20 mm b ≥ 20 mm h ≥ 20 mm Metal-free space for MDS E600 Note Underranging the standard values a, b and h will significantly reduce the field data. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-7 Mobile Data Memories 4.3 MDS E611 Ordering data Table 4-6 Ordering data for MDS E611 Order No. MDS E611 mobile data memory with 752-byte EEPROM Accessories: Spacer Mounting bracket Technical data 4-8 6GT2 300-0BB00 6GT2 190-0AA00 6GT2 190-0AB00 Figure 4-4 MDS E611 Table 4-7 Technical data of MDS E611 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at 40° C) 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200,000 Typical write cycles 1,000,000 Data retention time (at < +40° C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/mounting bracket Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 67 Physical y layout y Epoxy p y card Color Anthracite/black Material Fiber glass-reinforced epoxy resin Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 85.8 x 54.1 x 2.5 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-7 Technical data of MDS E611 Ambient temperature p Duringg operation p D i transportation During i and d storage -25° to +70° C -40° to +85° C Weight, approximate Field data Table 4-8 21 g Field data of MDS E611 SLG 70 ANT 0 SLG 70 ANT 1 Operating distance (Sa) --- 10 to 70 mm Limit distance (Sg) --- 100 mm Transmission window (L) --- Minimum distance from MDS to MDS --- 1 80 mm SLG 72 SLA 71 10 to 70 mm 10 to 70 mm 100 mm 100 mm )1 90 mm (Lx 80 mm (Ld) 60 mm (Ly)1 > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm For field geometry, see also figure 5-14. The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. Dimensions (in mm) Dimensional drawing R3 54.1 0.2 3.2 A A 60 0.2 85.8 0.2 Section A-A: Figure 4-5 2.5 0.2 Dimensions of MDS E611 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-9 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Metal Data memory Non-metal 20 mm Flush mounting in metal b Data memory a h Metal Non-metal Standard values: Figure 4-6 a ≥ 20 mm b ≥ 20 mm h ≥ 20 mm Metal-free space for MDS E611 Note Underranging the standard values a, b and h will significantly reduce the field data. The MDS can be mounted with metal screws (i.e., no significant effect on the range). 4-10 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Dimensional drawing Spacer: 6GT2 190-0AA00 Mounting bracket: 6GT2 190-0AB00 Tabs 24 Holding knobs 21 34 98 62 57 110 2.5 Holding bracket 60 88 107 121 36 4.5 10 The spacer can be mounted directly on metal. Together with the mounting bracket, this provides a distance of 20 mm between the MDS and metal. Mounting: – With 2 or 4 M4 screws – With rubber pads on the holding brackets (e.g., on mesh boxes) – With cable binders on the holding brackets (e.g., on mesh boxes) MDS with mounting bracket MDS with mounting bracket and spacer (assembled) Mounting bracket The MDS is slid into the mounting bracket. The knobs lock the MDS into the mounting bracket. The tabs of the mounting bracket are secured to a non-metal base as listed below. - Screws in the holes provided - Rivets in the holes provided - Nails through the holes - Staples through the plastic of the tabs - Insertion in the spacer The tabs can also be bent by 90°. Figure 4-7 SIEMENS Spacer Data memory Assembly: Slide MDS into mounting bracket. Bend tabs by 90°, and insert into spacer. Position the mounting bracket so that it covers the MDS as shown in the figure. It is automatically locked into place. Dimensions of the spacer and mounting bracket for the MDS E611 (For use with MDS E600, see note in figure 4-2.) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-11 Mobile Data Memories 4.4 MDS E623 The MDS E623 was constructed for tool coding in accordance with DIN 69873. It can be used everywhere where small data carriers and precise positioning are required (e.g., tool identification). Ordering data Table 4-9 Ordering data for MDS E623 Order No. MDS E623 mobile data memory Technical data 6GT2 300-0CD00 Figure 4-8 MDS E623 Table 4-10 Technical data of MDS E623 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at 40° C) 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200,000 Typical write cycles 1,000,000 Data retention time (at < +40° C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Mounting of the MDS Adhesive1; (e.g., Araldit AW2101/HW2951 or 2021; UHU-Plus endfest 300) Protection rating In acc. with EN 60529 In acc. with DIN 40050 (part 9) 4-12 IP 67 IP x9K (steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 75° C) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-10 Technical data of MDS E623 Physical layout Molded, shock-resistant plastic Color Black Material Epoxy resin Dimensions ∅ 10 x 4.5 (Dimensions and tolerances in acc. w. (Heel on bottom 0.5 x 45°) DIN 69873) Ambient temperature During operation –25° to +85° C During transportation and storage –40° to +100° C Weight, approximate 1 Field data 4g The processing specifications of the manufacturer must be adhered to. Table 4-11 Field data MDS E623 SLG 70 ANT 0 SIM 70 ANT 0 SLG 75 ANT 12 Metal-free installation (static) Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 6 mm 0 to 6 mm 0 to 4 mm Transmission window (Ld) 4 mm 4 mm 8 mm (average deviation ±2 mm) (average deviation ±2 mm) (average deviation ±4 mm) 6 mm 6 mm 5 mm Limit distance (Sg) Flush mounting in metal (static) Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 3.5 mm 0 to 3.5 mm 0 to 3 mm Transmission window (Ld) 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm (average deviation ±1.5 mm) (average deviation ±1.5 mm) (average deviation ±2 mm) 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm > 30 mm > 30 mm > 20 mm Limit distance (Sg) Minimum distance from MDS to MDS Note The MDS E623 is only designed for static operation. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-13 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on Metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CD00 MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted directly on metal. Figure 4-9 Mounting on metal: MDS E623 Flush mounting in Metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CD00 MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted flush in metal. Figure 4-10 4-14 Metal-free space for MDS E623 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Antenna side (active surface) Z Metal d2 MDS E623 d1 Mounting the MDS E623 flush in metal for tools b1 b2 t2 t1 Figure 4-11 Dimensions and mounting space for MDS E623 Table 4-12 Dimensions of MDS E623/mounting space in acc. w. DIN 69873 MDS E623 Einbauraum b1 0.5 x 45° b2 0.3 x 45° or R 0.3 d1 10 -0.04 -0.13 d2 10 +0.09 0 t1 4.5 -0 -0.1 t2 4.6 +0.2 0 The MDS may not protrude out of the receptacle hole. It must be flush with the outside contours. When installing, follow the mounting instructions of the MDS and take into account the particular conditions of your project (e.g., scope speed, temperature and use of cooling lubricant). Mounting with adhesive Bore mounting opening The surface to which adhesive will be applied must be dry and free of dust, grease, stripping agents and other soil. Apply adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Press MDS E623 in by hand. Antenna side to outside (see figure 4-11). Remove extra adhesive. Allow to harden in accordance with the instructions of the adhesive manufacturer. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-15 Mobile Data Memories Examples of mounting Z Figure 4-12 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a quick-release taper shaft Z Figure 4-13 4-16 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a retention shaft MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories 4.5 MDS E624 Ordering data Table 4-13 Ordering data for MDS E624 Order No. MDS E624 mobile data memory with 752-byte EEPROM Technical data Figure 4-14 MDS E624 Table 4-14 Technical data of MDS E624 6GT2 300-0CE00 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at 40° C) 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200,000 Typical write cycles 1,000,000 Data retention time (at < +40° C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/M3 screw Tightening moment at +20° C 1 Nm Protection rating In acc. with EN 60529 In acc. with DIN 40050 (part 9) IP 67 Physical layout Shock-resistant, molded plastic Color Black Material Epoxy resin MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 IP x9K (steam jet: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 75° C) 4-17 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-14 Technical data of MDS E624 Dimensions (D x H) in mm 27 x 4 Ambient temperature p During g operation p –25° to +125° C During transportation and storage –40° to +150° C Weight, approximate 5g Field data Table 4-15 Field data of MDS E624 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) Diameter of transmission window (Ld) Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 1 SLG 70 ANT 0 SLG 70 ANT 1 SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 30 SLA 71 0 to 8 mm 0 to 25 mm 0 to 30 mm 0 to 18 mm 0 to 25 mm 15 mm 40 mm 40 mm 24 mm 40 mm 12 mm (Ld) 38 mm (Ld) 60 mm (Lx)1 40 mm (Ly)1 14 mm (Ld) 38 mm (Ld) > 50 mm > 250 mm > 250 mm > 60 mm > 250 mm For field geometry, see also figure 5-14. The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. Dimensions (in mm) ∅ 3,5 ∅6 40,2 ∅270,2 Figure 4-15 4-18 Dimensions of MDS E624 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Data memotry Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CE00 Non-metal MDS E624 MOBY E h > 20 mm Flush mounting in metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS a > 20 mm 6GT2 300-0CE00 Non-metal MDS E624 MOBY E h > 20 mm Figure 4-16 Metal-free space for MDS E624 Note Underranging the standard values a and h will significantly reduce the field data. The MDS can be mounted with M3 countersunk metal screws (i.e., no significant effect on the range). MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 4-19 Mobile Data Memories 4-20 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5 5-1 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5.1 Introduction Application area The SLGs/SLAs provide inductive communication with the mobile data memories (i.e., MDSs) and the serial link to the interfaces (i.e., ASMs). Various SLG/SLA models – for short, medium and long distances to the MDS – are available to meet customer requirements. Layout and functions The SLG/SLA executes commands received from the interface. These commands for reading and writing data are converted via a modulator/demodulator circuit. Communication between MDS and SLG/SLA takes place via inductive alternating fields. The amount of data which can be transferred between SLG/SLA and MDS depends on the factors listed below. The speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window of the SLG/SLA The length of the transmission window Table 5-1 Overview table of SLG/SLA SLG Type Operating Distance Sa (Depending on MDS) Limit Distance Sg Temperature Range (During Operation) Circuit Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Antenna Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Protection Rating SLG 70 ANT 0 0 to 8 mm 15 mm -25° to +70° C 160 x 80 x 40 M18 x 50 IP 65 SLG 70 ANT 1 0 to 70 mm 100 mm -25° to +70° C 160 x 80 x 40 75 x 75 x 20 IP 65 SLG 72 0 to 70 mm 100 mm -25° to +70° C 160 x 80 x 40 --- IP 65 SLG 75 ANT 12 0 to 4 mm 5 mm -25° to +70° C 160 x 80 x 40 M12 x 40 IP 65 SLG 75 ANT 30 0 to 18 mm 24 mm -25° to +70° C 160 x 80 x 40 M30 x 58 IP 65 SLA 71 0 to 70 mm 100 mm -20° to +70° C --- 75 x 75 x 20 IP 65 1 5-2 Definition of IP 65 – Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof) – Full protection against touch – Protection against water jet MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5.2 SLG 70 ANT 0 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 70 ANT 0 is extremely suited to use in small assembly lines. The short installation distance between several SLG 70 ANT 0 antennas is a special feature. With the 2 screw nuts, the antenna head can be positioned with extreme precision for each application. Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 70 ANT 0 Table 5-2 Ordering data of SLG 70 ANT 0 Read/write device SLG 70 ANT 0 6GT2 301-0AA00 SLG plug connector and plug-in line See chapter 7.8 Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 70 ANT 0 Inductive interface to MDS Max. SLG-MDS read/write distances 15 mm. See field data. Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 19200 Baud Max. ASM-SLG cable length (at 24 V DC and line cross section of 0.2 mm2) 120 m Max. data cable length. See cable configuration in table 3-14. 1000 m Max. antenna cable length 0.45 m MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-3 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 70 ANT 0 Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Brief switch-on current 700 mA (max.) Operation (at 24 V) 180 mA (typ.) MTBF (at +40° C) 2.5 x 105 hours Housing Dimensions (in mm) For antenna head (∅ x thread x L) M18 x 1.5 x 50 For electronics without plug connector (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color Material Antenna Anthracite with orange head SLG housing Anthracite Antenna “Crastin” SLG housing Polyamide 12 Plug connection 6-pin SLG plug connection in acc. w. DIN 43651 Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 SLG housing IP 65 Antenna IP 67 (front) Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 30 g1 Total shock response spectrum, type II Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1 g (9 to 200 Hz)1 1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)1 Mounting of SLG 2 M5 screws Turning moment at room temperature Mounting of antenna 2 plastic nuts (M18 x 1.5) Ambient temperature During operation -25° to +70° C During transportation and storage -40° to +85° C Weight, approximate 510 g 1 Field data 5-4 Warning: Table 5-4 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and may not occur continuosly. Field data of SLG 70 ANT 0 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 8 mm Limit distance (Sg) 15 mm Transmission window Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLG to MDS (D) Da > 200 mm Db > 200 mm MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Transmission window L (Sa, min) 1 Ld Ld sg sa View of top 1 View of side Figure 5-2 At Sa,min, the transmission window mayincrease. Transmission window of SLG 70 ANT 0 Transmission window: To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be positioned within this field. ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ a a = 10 mm b = 10 mm MOBY E SLG 70 ANT 0 Metal-free space with flush installation Note: The limit and operating distances are reduced when the metal-free space is not adhered to. Figure 5-3 10 10 Metal-free space ANT 0 Metal-free space for SLG 70 ANT 0 FCC information Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SLG 70 ANT 0 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLG70ANT0 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-5 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Definition of distance D Da Db Da 200 mm Db 200 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-4 Distance D: SLG 70 ANT 0 Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 52 5 Cable length 0.45 m Antenna head 50 M18 Fine threading Pitch 1.5 160 Antenna side 5.5 MOBY E 25 5 80 Figure 5-5 5-6 24 ANT 0 Top view of antenna head 40 Dimensional diagram of SLG 70 ANT 0 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5.3 SLG 70 ANT 1 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 70 ANT 1 is a read/write device in the medium performance range. Since its antenna is larger, the SLG 70 ANT 1 creates a much larger field than the SLG 70 ANT 0, and a wider range can be achieved with the same data memories. During dynamic operation, the MDS can read/write more data. See chapter 3.3. Figure 5-6 SLG 70 ANT 1 read/write device Table 5-5 Ordering data of SLG 70 ANT 1 Read/write device SLG 70 ANT 1 6GT2 301-0AB00 SLG plug connector and plug-in line See chapter 7.8 Table 5-6 Technical data of SLG 70 ANT 1 Inductive interface to MDS Read/write distance SLG to MDS (max.) 10 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 19200 Baud Max. ASM-SLG cable length (at 24 V DC and line cross section of 0.2 mm2) 120 m Max. data cable length. See cable configuration in table 3-14. 1000 m Max. antenna cable length 0.45 m MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-7 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Table 5-6 Technical data of SLG 70 ANT 1 Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Brief switch-on current Operation (at 24 V) 700 mA (max.) 180 mA (typ.) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40° C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) For antenna head (W x H x D) 75 x 75 x 20 For electronics w/o plug (W x H x D) 160 x 80 x 40 Color Antenna SLG housing Anthracite Anthracite Material Antenna SLG housing Polyamide 12 Polyamide 12 6-pin SLG plug connection in acc. w. DIN 43651 Plug connection Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 5-8 IP 65 Antenna IP 67 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g1 Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of SLG 2 M5 screws Mounting of antenna 2 M5 screws Turning moment at room temperature 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25° to +70° C -40° to +85° C Weight (approx.) 620 g 1 Field data SLG housing Warning: Table 5-7 (9 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and may not occur continuosly. Field data of SLG 70 ANT 1 Operating distance (Sa) 10 to 70 mm Limit distance (Sg) 100 mm Median deviation (Ld) Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Transmission window MDS ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ Transmission window Sg Sa View of side SLG 70 ANT 1 View of top L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa,min) 1 Figure 5-7 Metal-free space 1 At Sa,min, the transmission window may increase. Transmission window of SLG 70 ANT 1 Metal-free space with flush mounting: a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metal base) Figure 5-8 FCC information Metal-free space of SLG 70 ANT 1 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SLG 70 ANT 1 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLG70ANT1 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-9 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Definition of distance D Da SLG 70 ANT 1 SLG 70 ANT 1 Db Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm SLG 70 ANT 1 Figure 5-9 Distance D for: SLG 70 ANT 1 Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 52 5 Cable length 0.45 m 5.5 5 160 5 75 20 5.5 View of top of antenna 25 5 80 Figure 5-10 5-10 40 Dimensional diagram of SLG 70 ANT 1 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5.4 SLG 72 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 72 is a read/write device in the medium performance range. Since its antenna is larger, the SLG 72 creates a larger field than the SLG 70 ANT 1. During dynamic operation, the MDS can read/write more data. See chapter 3.3. Figure 5-11 SLG 72 read/write device Table 5-8 Ordering data of SLG 72 Read/write device SLG 72 6GT2 301-0CA00 SLG plug connector and plug-in line See chapter 7.8 Table 5-9 Technical data of SLG 72 Inductive interface to MDS Read/write distance SLG to MDS (max.) 10 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 19200 Baud Max. ASM-SLG cable length (at 24 V DC and line cross section of 0.2 mm2) 120 m Max. data cable length. See cable configuration in table 3-14. 1000 m MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-11 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Table 5-9 Technical data of SLG 72 Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Brief switch-on current Operation (at 24 V) 700 mA (max.) 180 mA (typ.) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40° C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) 160 x 80 x 40 Color Anthracite Material Polyamide 12 Plug connection 6-pin SLG plug connection in acc. w. DIN 43651 Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g1 Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of SLG 2 M5 screws Turning moment at room temperature 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25° to +70° C -40° to +85° C Weight (approx.) 550 g 1 Field data Without plug (W x H x D) Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and may not occur continuosly. The exact field data are dependent on the type of MDS used. Table 5-10 5-12 (9 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 Field data of SLG 72 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 70 mm Limit distance (Sg) 100 mm Median deviation (L) Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Definition of distance D Y Y Da SLG 72 X X SLG 72 Db Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm Y SLG 72 X Figure 5-12 Distance D: for SLG 72 Dimensions (in mm) 40 80 5 X 70 Y 160 90 5.5 25 Figure 5-13 FCC information 5 Dimensional diagram of SLG 72 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SLG 72 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLG72 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-13 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ Transmission window MDS Transmission window Sa View of side SLG 72 70 ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ Standard configuration: Lengthwise x-axis (Lx) View of top M L (y, Sa, min) 1 L (x, Sa, max) = Lx L (y, Sa, max) = Ly L (x, Sa, min) 1 1 Sg At Sa,min, the transmission window may increase. Figure 5-14 Transmission window of SLG 72 Metal-free space Metal h h = Physical height of SLG Metal b b a a a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm Figure 5-15 5-14 Metal-free space of SLG 72 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5.5 SLG 75 ANT 12 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 75 ANT 12 is designed for tool identification. The small, compact antenna permits precise positioning with the included plastic nuts. The cable between the antenna and evaluation unit is 3 m long. The length cannot be changed. The antenna cable can be connected on the electronics side. The SLG 75 ANT 12 can be operated on the following interfaces: ASM 400, ASM 410, ASM 420, ASM 450 and ASM 470. Communication with the data carrier is only possible in static mode with the MDS E623 (tool pill). Figure 5-16 Read/write device SLG 75 ANT 12 Table 5-11 Ordering data for the SLG 75 ANT 12 Read/write device SLG 75 ANT 12 6GT2 301-0FC00 SLG plug connector and stub lines See chap. 7.8. Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLG 75 ANT 12 Inductive interface to MDS Read/write distances (SLG - MDS), max. 5 mm (Sg to MDS E623) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 19200 Baud Line length (ASM - SLG), max. (for 24 V DC and line cross section of 0.2 mm2) 120 m Max. data line length (see table 3-14, cable configuration) 1000 m MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-15 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLG 75 ANT 12 Antenna line length 3 m (can be connected on electronics side) MDS addressing Commands Direct access via addresses Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Max. of 700 mA 180 mA (typical) Switch-on current (brief) Operation (at 24 V DC) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40° C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) Antenna head (∅ x weight x length) M12 x 1.5 x 40 Electronics w/o plug connectors (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color (antenna) (SLG housing) Pastel turquoise Anthracite Material (antenna) (SLG housing) Crastin Polyamide 12 Plug connection Data 6-pin, SLG plug connector in acc. w. DIN 43651 (pin, device side) Antenna 4-pin on SLG housing Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 65 Antenna IP 67 (front) Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 30 g1 Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of the SLG 2 M5 screws Mounting of antenna 2 plastic nuts M12 x 1.5 Tightening moment at 20° C 3 Nm Ambient temperature Operation Transportation and storage -25°to + 70° C -40°to + 85° C Weight (approx.) 520 g Certification CE 1 5-16 SLG housing Warning: (3 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values. These values may not occur on a regular basis. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Field data Table 5-13 Field data of SLG 75 ANT 12 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 4 mm Limit distance (Sg) 5 mm Diameter of transmission window (Ld) 8 mm Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 80 mm Transmission window Transmission window Ld Ld sa sg View of top View of side Figure 5-17 Transmission window of SLG 75 ANT 12 Transmission window: The antenna of the MDS must be positioned inside this field to ensure reliable data communication. Metal-free space ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ MOBY E ANT 12 6GT2 399-1CC00 View of top View of side Note: Flush installation in metal reduces the limit and working distance. Figure 5-18 Metal-free space for SLG 75 ANT 12 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-17 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Definition of distance D Da Db Da 80 mm Db 80 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-19 Dimensions (in mm) Distance D: SLG 75 ANT 12 ANT 12 can be connected on electronics side Cable length 3 m Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 5 Antenna head 40 M12 Fine thread, incline: 1.5 160 Antenna side 5.5 MOBY E 25 80 Figure 5-20 5-18 5 17 ANT 12 View of top of antenna head 40 Dimensional drawing of SLG 75 ANT 12 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5.6 SLG 75 ANT 30 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 75 ANT 30 is designed for use in production plants and assembly lines. Its remote antenna permits greater distances to the evaluation unit. The antenna can be positioned very easily for all applications with two plastic nuts (included). The length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 3 m. The length cannot be changed. The antenna cable can be connected on the electronics side. The SLG 75 ANT 30 can be operated on the following interfaces: ASM 400, ASM 410, ASM 420, ASM 450 and ASM 470. Communication with the data carrier is only possible in static mode with the MDS E624. Figure 5-21 Read/write device SLG 75 ANT 30 Table 5-14 Ordering data for the SLG 75 ANT 30 Read/write device SLG 75 ANT 30 6GT2 301-0FD00 SLG plug connector and stub lines See chap. 7.8. Table 5-15 Technical data of the SLG 75 ANT 30 Inductive interface to MDS Read/write distances (SLG - MDS), max. 24 mm (Sg to MDS E624) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 19200 Baud Line length (ASM - SLG), max. (for 24 V DC and line cross section of 0.2 mm2) 120 m Max. data line length (see table 3-14, cable configuration) 1000 m MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-19 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Table 5-15 Technical data of the SLG 75 ANT 30 Antenna line length 3 m (can be connected on electronics side) MDS addressing Commands Direct access via addresses Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Max. of 700 mA 180 mA (typical) Switch-on current (brief) Operation (at 24 V DC) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40° C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) Antenna head (∅ x weight x length) M30 x 1.5 x 58 Electronics w/o plug connectors (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color (antenna) (SLG housing) Pastel turquoise Anthracite Material (antenna) (SLG housing) Crastin Polyamide 12 Plug connection Data 6-pin, SLG plug connector in acc. w. DIN 43651 (pin, device side) Antenna 4-pin on SLG housing Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 65 Antenna IP 67 (front) Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 30 g1 Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of the SLG 2 M5 screws Mounting of antenna 2 plastic nuts (M12 x 1.5) Tightening moment at 20° C 3 Nm Ambient temperature Operation Transportation and storage -25° to + 70° C -40° to + 85° C Weight (approx.) 520 g Certification CE 1 5-20 SLG housing Warning: (3 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values. These values may not occur on a regular basis. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Field data Table 5-16 Field data of SLG 75 ANT 30 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 18 mm Limit distance (Sg) 24 mm Diameter of transmission window (Ld) 14 mm Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 125 mm Transmission window Transmission window Ld Ld sa sg View of top View of side Figure 5-22 Transmission window of SLG 75 ANT 30 Transmission window: The antenna of the MDS must be positioned inside this field to ensure reliable data communication. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-21 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Metal-free space ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 20 20 20 MOBY E ANT 30 6GT2 399-1CD00 View of side View of top Figure 5-23 Metal-free space for SLG 75 ANT 30 Definition of distance D Da Db Da 125 mm Db 125 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-24 5-22 Distance D: SLG 75 ANT 30 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Dimensions (in mm) ANT 30 can be connected on electronics side Cable length 3 m Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 5 Antenna head 58 M30 Fine thread, incline: 1.5 160 Antenna side 5.5 MOBY E 25 80 Figure 5-25 5 43 ANT 30 View of top of antenna head 40 Dimensional drawing of SLG 75 ANT 30 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-23 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5.7 SLA 71 Application area Ordering data The SLA 71 is a middle-of-the-line read/write antenna. It permits greater distances to the evaluation unit (ASM). The length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m (max.). The SLA 71 can be operated on the following interfaces: ASM 724 and ASM 754. Figure 5-26 Read/write antenna SLA 71 Table 5-17 Ordering data for the SLA 71 6GT2 301-2BB00 Read/write antenna SLA 71 Accessories: Technical data Standard connection cable between SLA 71 and ASM 724, and ASM 754; length 5 m (not included with SLA 71) 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50; length 25 m 6GT2 391-1BN25 Table 5-18 Technical data of the SLA 71 Inductive interface to MDS 5-24 Read/write distances (SLG - MDS), max. 100 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 106 kbaud Line length to ASM, max. 55 m Voltage (only via ASM) 12 V DC Current consumption at room temperature 160 mA (typical) MTBF (at +40° C) 1 x 105 hours MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Table 5-18 Technical data of the SLA 71 Housing 75 x 75 x 20 Color Anthracite Material Polyamide 12 Plug connection 0.5 m cable with 8-pin M12 plug connector (pin on device side) Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 65 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g1 Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 5g 10 g Mounting of the SLA 71 2 M5 screws Tightening moment at 20° C 2 Nm Ambient temperature Operation Transportation and storage -20° to +70° C -40° to +85° C Weight without connection cable (approx.) 150 g 1 Field data Dimensions without connection cable (L x W x H in mm) Warning: Table 5-19 (9 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values. These values may not occur on a regular basis. Field data of SLA 71 Working distance (Sa) 10 to 70 mm Limit distance (Sg) 100 mm Diameter of transmission window (Ld) Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D) Da > 800 mm MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-25 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Transmission window MDS ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ Transmission window Sa Sg View of side SLA 71 View of top L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa,min) 1 Figure 5-27 Metal-free space 1 The transmission window may be larger when Sa, min. Transmission window of SLA 71 Metal-free space with flush mounting a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metallic base) Figure 5-28 5-26 Metal-free space for SLA 71 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas Definition of distance D Da SLA 71 SLA 71 Db Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm SLA 71 Figure 5-29 Distance D: SLA 71 Dimensions (in mm) Cable length: 0.5 m 5 20 75 Figure 5-30 Dimensional drawing of SLA 71 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 5-27 Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas 5-28 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6 6-1 Interfaces 6.1 Introduction Application area ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY E components (i.e., SLGs/ SLAs and MDSs) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S5/S7), PCs or computers. Up to four SLGs/SLAs can be connected depending on the interface used. Layout and functions An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores these in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command has arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution. Overview Table 6-1 ASM Type Overview of the interfaces Interfaces to PC/ Computer Interfaces to SLG/SLA Function Blocks SLG/SLA Connections Dimensions (WxHxD in mm) Temperature Range (During Operation) Protection Rating ASM 400 Can be installed in S5-115-155U 9-pin sub D FB 250/ socket 230/252 1 per CM 4 per ASM 0° to +55° C IP 00 ASM 410 Can be installed in S5-100U/ ET 200U Can be connected via bus module 2 45 x 135 x 100 (multiplex) 0° to +60° C IP 20 ASM 420 V.24, RS 422, TTY (w. multipoint terminal strip, model F, DIN 41612) 9-pin sub D 3964R socket Driver 1 20 x 100 x 160 0° to +55° C IP 00 ASM 450 To PROFIBUS-DP (screw connection) 2 5-pin proximity switch plug connectors FC 45 FC 46 FB 240 2 134 x 110 x 55 (multiplex) 0° to +55° C IP 65 ASM 470 Can be installed in S7-300/ ET 200M Via screw terminals FC 47 FB 47 2 45 x 125 x 120 (multiplex) 0° to +60° C IP 20 ASM 724 RS 232/RS 422 (9-pin submin D socket) 9-pin submin D socket MOBY API 4 x SLA 205 x 130 x 60 (multiplex) -25° to +55° C IP 40 ASM 754 PROFIBUS-DP/ V1 (9-pin submin D socket) 9-pin submin D socket FC 45 4 x SLA 205 x 130 x 60 (multiplex) -25° to +55° C IP 40 3964R driver MOBY API C-lib --- -25° to +75° C IP 67 (with special plug) SIM 6-2 RS 232/RS 422 Integrated (15-pin submin D plug connnector 160 x 80 x 40 (without ext. ANT) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.2 ASM 400 6.2.1 Overview Application area ASM 400/401 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the following SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers. S5-155U/F (all CPUs) S5-135U (all CPUs) S5-155U/H (all CPUs) Layout and functions ASM 400 interfaces consist of the basic module in double Europe format and the CM 422 channel submodule. The basic module can be equipped with one to four channel submodules. Mixed configuration is not permitted. The ASM 400 with the CM 422 operates in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S5. When used with function block FB 250, up to 32 channel submodules (i.e., eight 4-channel interfaces) can be operated in one SIMATIC. When FB 252 is used, the maximum number of channel submodules is increased from 32 to 96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models can be processed via the FBs. The user addresses the data on the MDS via a command table in the data block. The user addresses user data via absolute addresses. Note To achieve optimal transmission times, the length of the block should not exceed 150 bytes per command. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-3 Interfaces ASM 400 with channel submodule CM 422 SLG SLG MDS MDS Figure 6-1 Communication between ASM 400 and user program SLG MDS SLG MDS Configurator of ASM 400 Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors. Cycle time and type of programmable controller Software used (i.e., FB 250) Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps. The user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called, the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM. The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user and the FB are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. ASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. 6-4 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-2 Ordering data of ASM 400 Order No. ASM 400 interface consisting of basic module and CM 422 channel module Basic module with connection to STG, with 4 slide-in slots for CM 422 channel module, without channel module 6GT2 002-0AA00 CM 422 channel module 6GT2 002-0AB00 MOBY software1 6GT2 080-2AA10 with FB 230/240/250 Description of ASM 400/401 German 6GT2 097-3AB00-0DB1 English 6GT2 097-3AB00-0DB2 Description of FB 250 for ASM 400 German 6GT2 097-3AA00-0DA1 English 6GT2 097-3AA00-0DA2 Plug-in lines and accessories See chapter 7.8. 1 See chapter 7.1. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-5 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-3 Technical data of ASM 400 Channel Submodule CM 422 Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Plug connector 9-pin sub D socket Max. interface/line length RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type SLG which can be connected 1 SLG per CM Software functions Programming With STEP 5 function block FB 250 Commands Read data, write data, initialize MD Access directly via addresses Supply voltage DC 5/24 V via internal bus Interfaces ASM 400 Interfaces for CM/SLG ASM 400 (max.) 4 CM 422 Interface to STG 4F RS 422, 9-pin sub D socket Interface for 24 V DC 2-pin plug connector (included) Supply voltage Nominal value 5/24 V DC Permissible range Internal (at 5 V) 4.75 to 5.25 V DC External (at 24 V) 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption (max.) Internal (at 5 V) 1 channel 2 channels 3 channels 4 channels 370 490 610 730 mA mA mA mA External (at 24 V) 1 channel 2 channels 3 channels 4 channels 400 800 1200 1600 mA mA mA mA Fine-wire fuse M 1.25 A/250 V Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Rel. humidity at 25° C 0° to +55° C -20° to +70° C Space requirements 1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm) < 95% Weight (approx.) 6-6 ASM 400 0.44 kg CM 422 0.1 kg MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Function block FB 250 Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 program and the ASM 400 interface module. FB 250 can be used on the following “programmable controllers.” 115U/F 135U-R/S 155U/H FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with FB 250. Primary functions of FB 250 Convert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM All communication with the ASM via command data exchange Error handling: Command repetition; Preparation of errors for the user Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command Reading and writing with a user command Any address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one command. Control of PLC cycle load via the user Data transmission between FB and MDS can be subdivided into three phases. Supply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parameter Transmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS Supply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface When the P address area is available, FB 252 also supports operation of the ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-7 Interfaces 6.2.2 Hardware Description Plug connectors and their assignment Metal front plate Connection plug for the STG service and test device 3 LEDs per channel: Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Channel module no. 1 9-pin sub D socket Plug Connector Assignment to SLG or STG Channel module no. 2 Screw for connection of channel module to basic module for EMC operation Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing Designation Not used + Sending + Receiving Not used - Receiving - Sending Ground (0 V) +24 V Not used Cable shield Channel module no. 3 Connection plug for SLG 9-pin sub D plug connector with screw-type lock, order no. 6GT2090-0BB00 Channel module no. 4 + 24 Volt GND Figure 6-2 6-8 24 Volt plug connector (This plug connector is included with the ASM.) Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Switches and plug-in jumpers ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Switch 4 1 2 OFF = 0 ON = 1 X20 OFF = 0 ON = 1 8 1 4 1 8 1 x Switch 1 Switch 2 Plug connector for SIMATIC bus Switch 3 Figure 6-3 Address settings x 1 and 2 must always be jumpered on X20. Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400 S4 = Setting of the type of addressing S2 = Setting of the page frame number S3 = Setting of the module address (linear addressing with PESP) S1 = Address setting when PESP is not used Table 6-4 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 ASM 400 Switch Setting Start Adress of ASM Switch S3 4321 Switch S4 21 FB 250 Parameterization ADR FB 252 Parameterization KAN* QADR KAN 0 0000 01 0 1-4 16 0001 16 32 0010 48 0011 64 0100 (Corresponds to chanchan nel module 1 to 4) 80 0101 96 0110 112 0111 128 1000 (This setting tti of switch 4 must always l be used when the module is operated in standard 128 mode.) 32 Not available 48 64 80 96 112 1-4 128 (Corresponds to chanchan nel module 1 to 4) 144 144 1001 144 160 1010 160 176 1011 176 192 1100 192 208 1101 208 208 224 1110 224 224 240 1111 240 240 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 160 176 192 6-9 Interfaces Settings on the channel module Hybrid for serial interface CM422 für ASM 400 Plug-in jumper X20 X21 removed CPU 80C32 EPROM Plug-in jumper X20: Removed: Normal operation Inserted: Test operation; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when malfunctions occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions during commissioning. Figure 6-4 6-10 Settings on the channel module MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-5 CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5491-0LB11) Figure 6-6 CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5491-0LB11) Figure 6-7 CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-11 Interfaces Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5491-0LB11) Figure 6-8 CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5491-0LB11) Figure 6-9 Module rack ER 700-0, ER 701-1 and ER 701-2 CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) ASM 400 MOBY interface modules cannot be used. Module rack ER 701-3 Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 AS 314, AS 310, IM 317 IM 307 or IM 317 (only starting with ER 701-3LA13) 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5491-0LB11) Figure 6-10 6-12 ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Central controller S5-135U/ -155U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Figure 6-11 S5-135U/-155U central controller Central controller S5-155U/155H Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Figure 6-12 S5-155U/-155H central controller Expansion device EG S5-183U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-3 Interface 310 or 314 Figure 6-13 EG S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/-155U MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-13 Interfaces Expansion device EG S5-184U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-14 EG S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U Expansion device EG S5-185U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 314 Figure 6-15 EG S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H Expansion device EG S5-187U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-16 6-14 EG S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.3 ASM 410 Application area Interface ASM 410 can be used in the SIMATICs listed below. S5-90U (max. of 2) S5-95U (max. of 4) S5-100U (max. of 8) ET 100U (max. of 2) ET 200U (max. of 4) Since this ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write devices and the STG service test device, compatibility with all MOBY components is ensured. Layout and function LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interferenceimmune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY interface to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are fetched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/ PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation, one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute addresses. Bus module of PLC S5-100U with ASM 410 STG SIEMENS SIEMENS SLG SLG MDS Figure 6-17 MDS Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-15 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-5 Ordering data of ASM 410 Order No. ASM 410 interface 6GT2 002-0BA00 SIMATIC S5, bus module Screw-type connection Crimp connection, with crimp contacts, increased EMC resistance 6ES5 700-8MA11 6ES5 700-8MA22 Description of ASM 410 6-16 German 6GT2 097-3AC00-0DA1 English 6GT2 097-3AC00-0DA2 Plug-in lines and accessories See chapter 7.8. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-6 Technical data of ASM 410 Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Connection (max.) 2 SLGs can be connected via a separate bus module Line length (typ. max.) 1000 m/RS 422, depending on SLG and type of cable Number of SLGs Static operation Dynamic operation 2 SLGs (7x) Interface to STG RS 422, 9-pin sub D plug connection Interface for 24 V DC Via a separate bus module 1 SLG (7x) Software functions Programming With STEP5 directly via process image (PIO/PII); no function block required; 5 bytes processed per command Commands Select channel 1 or 2, read MDS, write MDS, initialize MDS, etc. Supply voltage Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%) 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Internal (at 5 V) Typical 20 to 60 mA (20 mA = long cycle time) (60 mA = short cycle time) Max. 110 mA (PLC in STOP status) External (at 24 V DC) All SLGs, SLG switched off 90 mA (see SLG description) Power consumption, typ. (without SLG) 2.5 W Cooling Convection cooling Isolation group C in acc. w. VDE 0110 Protection rating IP20 in acc. w. IEC 529 Physical stress IEC 68-2-27 Ambient temperature During operation Horizontal SIMATIC layout y Vertical SIMATIC layout 0° to +60° C During transportation and storage -25° to +70° C Weight (approx.) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 0° to +40° C 0.25 kg 6-17 Interfaces Slots in PLC S5-90U PLC S5-90U provides a maximum of four slots for additional modules. Up to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module. Slots in PLC S5-95U ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0 to 7. Up to four modules can be used on one PLC. Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used. Slots in PLC S5-100U S5-100U 6-18 ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-100U in slots 0 to 7. Up to eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slotoriented addressing. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 64 to 71 72 to 79 80 to 87 88 96 104 112 120 to to to to to 95 103 111 119 127 Slot number Address assignment Free slots for additional digital modules MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When parameterizing the module with the “COM ET 100U” software, the module must be specified with “4AX” in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 occupies eight input bytes and eight output bytes (i.e., 16 bytes). Since a maximum of 32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the main controller, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted. When other modules are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410, only one module can be connected. On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the PLC (i.e., P, Q, IM3 and IM4). SIMATIC C P U Central controller S5-115 U S5-135 U S5-155 U ET 100U Max. cable length 3000 m Max. of 2 ASM 410s per ET 100U ASM 410 ET 100U DI DO DO Max. of 32 ET 100Us Figure 6-18 Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 200U Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions. The ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in slow mode. See ET 200U manual for how to set slow mode. The “COM ET 200U” software is used to parameterize the ASM 410. The ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with “095”. Up to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used. Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-19 Interfaces Physical layout The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA22). Ventilation slits of the adapter capsule: Make sure the ventilation slits are not obstructed during operation. Forced module ventilation is not required. Label insert: Short texts in English are on the back. LEDs A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 Fehler aktiv ANW 1.SLG 2.SLG Power 1 2 3 Betriebsart 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Status and error LEDs A B Operating mode selection switch 6 8 A 4 C 2 0 E normal ECC Testbetr. Test+ECC INIT norm INIT ECC res. res. Plug connector for serial S5 bus TEST 8 1.SLG bzw. 2.SLG 9 res. F 5 9 9-pin sub D plug connector for STG with stub line 6GT2091-0B... (screw-type lock) 6 1 STG 6 Anschaltmodul MOBY E Coding pin (not visible; on back of module) in position “h” (i.e., analog module) 10-pin plug connector for bus module (24 V supply; SLG connection) 6GT2002–0BA00 1 Figure 6-19 6-20 2 3 4 5 6 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-7 No. Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 Color Meaning A1 Red Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the hardware of the module is defective. A2 Yellow Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the presence check is enabled. A3 Green Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when presence check is being used. B1 Green B1 = 1st SLG is in operation. Remember: Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 and B2) may be on at a time. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B2 Green B2 = 2nd SLG is in operation. Remember: Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 and B2) may be on at a time. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B3 Green B3 = power on This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The interface module can be tested with the STG. Setting the operating mode The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the front of the ASM. Positions 0 to 7 Setting of the operating mode: ASM 410 uses the serial S5 bus. The STG interface is switched off. Positions 8 to F Test operation with the STG: Telegrams from the S5 are no longer processed (does not apply to MOBY E). Note The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on MOBY activities. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-21 Interfaces Table 6-8 Switch Setting Short Description on Label Insert Meaning 0 Normal Normal operating mode; read and write all MDS types; ECC driver is disabled. 11 ECC driver Read and write all MDS types; EEC driver is enabled. 2 Test operation All MDS types can be processed during test operation. The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for communication with the MDS so that weak points and malfunctions can be detected during commissioning. 31 Test + ECC The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch setting 2. 4 INIT normal Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted. 51 INIT ECC Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same as switch setting 4. 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 81 Test 1st or 2nd SLG 9 to F Reserved 1 6-22 Operating modes for ASM 410 An STG can be connected via the 9-pin sub D plug connector so that all MOBY E hardware can be tested. Do not use switch positions 1, 3, 5 and 8 with MOBY E. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Wiring of one or two SLGs BUSMODULE Mounting rail 1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10 Terminal strip on bus module Cable shield Shield +24 V Gn 0V Ye Color ID3 for stub lines from Siemens Wh Br Pk From external power supply 1st SLG Gr Gn Ye Wh Br Pk 2nd SLG Gr Stub line incl. SLG plug connector and open end with core sleeves 6GT2 091-0D...2 Max. cable length = 1000 m1 1 Maximum cable length depends on the SLG and the tolerance of the external 24 V supply. 2 In acc. with MOBY length key 3 Color ID Gn = green = pin 4 in SLG plug connector; Ye = yellow = pin 5 in SLG plug connector; Wh = white = pin 6 in SLG plug connector; Br = brown = pin 1 in SLG plug connector; Pk = pink = pin 2 in SLG plug connector; Gr = gray = pin 3 in SLG plug connector. Figure 6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-23 Interfaces 6.4 ASM 420 Application area ASM 420 interfaces all general-purpose modules for the operation of MOBY E devices with a serial interface to the following components. All computers PCs Controllers of other manufacturers Layout and functions ASM 420 interfaces are available with one of three physical interfaces (i.e., RS 422, V.24 and TTY). They are available in single Europe format and can be installed in all standard module racks. The ASM 420 accesses data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. Note To achieve optimal transmission times, the length of the block should not exceed 150 bytes per command. Possible installation of ASM 420 The ASM 420 is a plug-in card without a special protection rating. Several possible methods of card installation are available to the user. The user’s own plug-in card holder which is mounted in a switching cabinet. The user provides the 24 V voltage supply. Four or 8 ASM 420 can be installed in module rack BGT 4/BGT 8. The module rack includes a power pack. Cf. chapter 7.2. An ASM 420 can be installed in the “plastic housing.” The housing is small and is equipped with a plug connector power pack. Cf. chapter 7.3. 6-24 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces PG AT-comp. PC Interfaces: V.24, TTY and RS 422 External PLC computer ASM 420/421 SLG See chap. 7.2 for module rack. MDS Figure 6-21 Configurator for ASM 420 Hardware ASM 420 Base connector (X1) Safety fuse (315 mA, delayed) Switch terminal strip (S1) for setting the operating mode EPROM ANW aktiv Error CPU 3 LEDs: Red LED: Indication of errors Yellow LED: Indication of an active SLG Green LED: Indication of the presence of an MDS 9-pin sub D socket with screw-type lock (X2) for connection of the SLG. The SLG can also be connected via the base connector. Plug Connector Assignment for the SLG Pin Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Geh. Figure 6-22 Not used + Sending +Receiving Not used – Receiving – Sending Ground (0 V) + 24 V Not used Cable shield ASM 420 interface with operational and indicator elements MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-25 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-9 Ordering data of ASM 420 Order No. ASM 420 interface With V.24 (RS 232) interface 6GT2 002-0CA00 With RS 422 (RS 485, V.11) interface 6GT2 002-0CB00 With TTY (linear current) interface 6GT2 002-0CC00 MOBY software1 6GT2 080-2AA10 with FB 230/240/250, FC 47, 3964R drivers and tools for DOS Module rack with power pack For 4 ASM 420s 6GT2 090-0KA00 For 8 ASM 420s 6GT2 090-0LA00 Description of ASM 420 German 6GT2 097-3AF00-0DA1 English 6GT2 097-3AF00-0DA2 Description of T3964R, stapled German 6AW5 450-4BX00-0K English 6AW5 450-4BX00-1K Plug-in lines and accessories See chapter 7.8. 1 6-26 See chapter 7.1. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-10 Technical data of ASM 420 Interface to PC/computer Connection Via multi-point terminal strip (model F, DIN 41612) Procedure 3964R SINEC L1 LAUF SINUMERIK protocol Transmission rate 2400 to 9600 baud and 38400 baud1 Line length (typ. max.) 1000 m (shielded)/TTY 1000 m (shielded)/RS 422 30 m (shielded)/V.24 Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Connection 9-pin p sub D socket Line length Depends on SLG; max. of 1000 m (shielded) Number of SLGs connectable 1 Software functions Programming Depends on PC, computer, external PLC Driver for MS-DOS 3964R driver with MS-C interface Driver for Windows 95 3964R driver on request MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data, write data, and so on Supply voltage Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption No-load current (max.) ( ) 200 mA (without SLG, DO not loaded) Ambient temperature During operation 0° to +55° 55 C During transportation and stosto g rage -40° 40° to +70° C Protection rating in acc. w. IEC 529 IP00 Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 20 x 100 x 160 (single Europe format) Weight (approx.) 0.2 kg 1 Assignment of base connector X1 A baud rate > 9600 cannot be used for TTY. The following components are connected to base connector X1. Voltage supply of ASM and SLG Serial interface to user Protective ground (shield) Control and signal lines (optional) SLG (optional) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-27 Interfaces Table 6-11 Assignment of base connector X1 for ASM 420 Pin b2 Assigment Pin 0V z2 Depends on type of interface 24 V Depends on type of interface V.24 RS422 TTY V.24 RS422 TTY b4 - R+ +EM z4 TxD E+ -EM b6 RxD D+ +SE z6 - R- -SE b8 - D- -1 z8 GND E- - b10 z10 b12 DI0 z12 DI1 b14 DO0 z14 DO1 b16 ASM has user data or (Request) acknowledgment z16 Select module (Select) b18 Error code (same as red LED) z18 Presence (ANW) (same as green LED) b20 SLG receiving + z20 SLG receiving - b22 SLG sending + z22 SLG sending - 2 digital inputs and outputs p each for data carrier controller b24 z24 b26 z26 b28 z28 b30 Protective ground z30 b32 0V z32 1 R+ E+ D+ RDE- Setting operating mode for ASM 420 Assigment 2 digital inputs and outputs p each for data carrier controller Protective ground Do not wire pin b8 for TTY mode. (Terminal resistance) TxD (Transmit data) (Receiving) RxD (Receive data) (Sending) +EM (Receiving) (Terminal resistance) -EM (Receiving) (Sending) +SE (Sending) (Receiving) -SE (Sending) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON = ^ “1” OFF = ^ “0” Setting of the procedure to user Figure 6-23 MDS controller Switch strip S1 of ASM 420 The operating modes which can be set here simplify controlling and monitoring the data memory by the user. 6-28 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-12 MDS controller and presence check Meaning Switch 7 8 0 0 No data memory controller; presence check is disabled; DI/DO can be programmed as desired with the status command. 0 1 Presence check via ASM firmware DI can be used as desired; can be scanned with the DI/DO command. 1 0 Presence check via DI0 and DI1 DI0 = 1 → MDS entering DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving 1 1 Presence check via DI1 DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving DI0 is free and can be scanned with the status command. Table 6-13 Setting the procedure Meaning Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 b b 1 0 0 0 39964R: ASM = slave b b 1 1 0 0 3964R: ASM = master Standard 3964R procedure for all interfaces: Standard telegrams are processed by the ASM. b b = baud rate (see below) b b a a 1 0 SINUMERIK 850/880 protocol (without response telegram) Switch: 3 4 ASM-Addess (= a a) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 (always present) 1 2 3 b b = baud rate Caution: When SINUMERIK is used, switches 7 and 8 must be used to switch on a type of presence check. b b 0 1 0 0 Switch settings not used at this time b b 0 0 0 0 (ASM will not operate with these switch settings.) b b 0 1 0 1 b b 0 0 0 1 Baud rate: (= b b) (Applies to Lauf, 3964R and SINUMERIK procedures) 1 1 x x x x 38400 baud (not permitted for TTY interface) 0 0 x x x x 9600 baud 0 1 x x x x 4800 baud 1 0 x x x x 2400 baud MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-29 Interfaces Table 6-13 Setting the procedure Meaning Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 a a a 1 1 a SINEC L1 (only RS 422 and TTY) aaaa = Address of ASM on SINEC L1 bus (ASM is always the slave.) The following address assignment appliesSwitch: 4 3 2 1 SINEC Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SINEC addresses 17 to 31 are not available since they cannot be set on the ASM. b b 1 1 0 1 Lauf procedure The standard telegrams are processed by the ASM. All interfaces are available. b b = baud rate 0 1 1 0 0 1 STG connection 3964R procedure; ASM = slave Baud rate = 4800 baud Telegram layout is handled internally by MOBY E and can be disregarded by the user. User interface of ASM = RS 422 6-30 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.5 ASM 450 Application area The ASM 450 interfaces are modules for operation of MOBY devices via PROFIBUS-DP on the following components. All computers and PCs All controllers When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available to the user. Figure 6-24 ASM 450 ASM 450 interface The ASM 450 accesses data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. Two interfaces are available to the user. The ASM 450 uses cyclic operation with function block FB 240 or FC 44. The description of FC 44 (appendix B) must be adhered to by the SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must use the description of the FC 44 function for the ASM 450. The ASM 450 uses acyclic operation with PROFIBUS-DP/V1 (available by mid 2001). The FC 45 function block is available for the SIMATIC S7. In this mode, very large quantities of data can be transferred to and from the ASM without overloading the PROFIBUS cycle. In addition, the ASM can execute chained MDS commands very quickly in this mode. Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed while passing by (i.e., dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time to switch over the second SLG. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-31 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-14 Ordering data for ASM 450 6GT2 002-0EB00 ASM 450 for PROFIBUS-DP, max. of 2 SLGs connectable Accessories Plug connector for PROFIBUS-DP connection and 24 V power supply 6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0 Connection cable, ASM 450 SLG 6GT2 091-1CH20 Opt. connection plug, ASM 450 SLG 6GT2 090-0BC00 MOBY software 6GT2 080-2AA10 Other accessories for ASM 450 (network components) See SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and SIMATIC ET 200X manual. Replacement part: Plug plate, T functionality for PROFIBUS 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0 Description-ASM 450/FC 44 German English Technical data Table 6-15 6GT2 097-3AC30-0DA1 6GT2 097-3AC30-0DA2 Technical data of ASM 450 Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS-DP (DP/V1 starting mid 2001) Procedure in acc. w. EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS Connection PG 11 screw connection PROFIBUS and supply voltage plug connectors are not included. Cf. catalog ST 70: 6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0) Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition) Max. block length 208 bytes Serial interface to the SLG 6-32 Plug connector 2 coupling plug connectors (M12) Line length (max.) 1000 m, depends on SLG (2 m = standard length Other fabricated cables 2.5 m to 20 m)) SLGs which can be connected 2 SLG 7x (multiplex operation) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-15 Technical data of ASM 450 Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS-DP master Function blocks SIMATIC S5 FB 240 SIMATIC S7 FC 45 or FC 44 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, and so on Supply voltage Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Max. of 180 mA; typical 130 mA (without SLG, DO not loaded) Digital inputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes Input voltage For logical “0” 0 to 5 V DC For logical “1” 13 to 30 V DC Input current for signal “1” 7 mA (typ.) Delay time < 10 msec Digital outputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes Max. permissible current 0.5 A Short-circuit protection Yes (electronic) Line length (max.) 30 m Ambient temperature During operation 0° to +55° C During transportation and storage –40° to +70° C Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 Mounting 4 M5 screws, mounting on any plate or wall Weight (approx.) 0.5 kg Protection rating IP 67 MTBF (at 40° C) 30 x 104 hours = 34 years MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-33 Interfaces AT–comp. PC PROFIBUS-DP master module (e.g., S7-400 CPU) PROFIBUS cable To additional PROFIBUS stations 2 m1 24 V for SLGs 2nd SLG MDS 1 Standard cable length Figure 6-25 1st SLG MDS Configurator of ASM 450 Hardware description The ASM 450 is equipped with the same housing as the ET 200X decentral I/O device. See ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0) for general technical information (e.g., mounting, operation and wiring, and general technical specifications). Accessories and power supply components are also described in this manual. SLG connection technique Since an SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the ASM 450, a prefabricated cable (cf. chapter 3.7) makes it easy to connect the SLG. In its standard version, the connection cable has a length of 2 m. Other cables are available on request. An SLG plug connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who want to make their own cable. Cable and SLG plug connector can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. 6-34 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Plug hood removed SLG-cable: 6GT2 090-0A PG11 screw connection, max. cable diameter = 6.5 mm (Do not tighten screw until plug connector is assembled.) 58 2 screws to open the plug connector 18.5 Coupling connector M12 on ASM 450 Protection rating IP 52 Figure 6-26 Connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 S S 5 6 S S 1 2 3 4 Core Color Connection to Pin of SLG connector Green White Brown Yellow Gray Pink Not conn. Shield 4 6 1 5 3 2 - Connection plug, ASM 450 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) ASM side SLG side Two 5-pin, round M12 plug connectors SLG plug connector (socket) 22.5 2 m1 X1/2 18.5 X1/3 X1 X2 X1/1 X1/4 X2/3 X2/1 White Brown Green Yellow Gray Pink 6 1 4 5 3 2 X1/5 1 Standard cable length Figure 6-27 X2/5 Connection cable, ASM 450 SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-35 Interfaces SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450 1st x1 x2 x2 x4 Figure 6-28 2nd 3rd 4th 5th SLG - SLG 2xDO SLG - SLG 2xDI SLG SLG ASM 450 SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450 The versions shown in figure 6-28 can be set up with the standard cables of MOBY or ET 200X. Note Although the configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the ASM 450, the components require special customer-related wiring. The following figure shows a dimensional drawing of an ASM 450 with bus connection plugs. You must add the length of the PG screw connection and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified. 110 53.5 28.25 Dimensional drawing of ASM 450 with mounting holes Ø 5.5 120 134 Figure 6-29 6-36 90 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Pin allocation The following figure shows the pin allocation of the ASM 450. LEDs for PROFIBUS-DP SF: System fault (hardware error on ASM 450) BF: Bus fault (error on PROFIBUS-DP) ON: On when the logic voltage is present on ASM 450 (is generated from the 24 V suply voltage) DC 24 V: On when the 24 V supply voltage is connected to ASM 450 4 56 X11 SF BF ON DC 24 V 12 3 4 56 X1 2 1 X12 SLG1 X2 3 RxD 5 4 ERR ANW 12 3 DE0 4 56 X3 LEDs for MOBY DE1 SLG2 X4 RxD X13 12 3 Socket X11 and X12 (PROFIBUS-DP) X13 (Supply voltage) Pin Allocation 1 Signal B (red) 2 PE 3* PE 4 Signal A (green) 5* L+ 6* M 1 PE 2 L+ 3 M 4 PE 5 L+ 6 M RxD: SLG active with command ANW: MDS present or status of DA1 ERR: Error indication or status of DA0 SLG1/2: Indicates the selected SLG. Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected. DE0/1 : Status of the digital inputs Socket X1/X3 Pin Allocation (SLG) 1 2 3 4 5 X2/X4 +RxD +TxD -TxD -RxD PE X2 1 2 3 4 5 + 24 V DA1 0V DA0 PE X4 + 24 V DE1 0V DE0 PE * Do not circuit Figure 6-30 Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-37 Interfaces Example for bared lengths The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are valid for all cables which you can connect to the connection plug. Any shield braiding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off. 45 ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ Twisted and trimmed shield braiding 6 Figure 6-31 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance Length of baring for a 5-core cable The plug plate must be removed from the ASM 450 before you can set the PROFIBUS address or circuit the terminating resistance. The plug plate covers the DIP switches. The following figure shows the location of the DIP switches on the ASM 450 and a sample setting of each. Example: Terminating resistance circuited (status on delivery) on off Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery) 23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120 Res . ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 6-32 File handler Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance Note The PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450 must always correspond to the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM 450 with the configuration software. For correct functioning of the terminating resistance, always switch both DIP switches of the terminating resistance to “On” or “Off”. 6-38 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.6 ASM 470 Application area The ASM 470 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems. Layout and functions Up to eight ASM 470 interfaces can be installed and operated in one module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several module racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470 can be installed and operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300 configuration, up to 32 ASM 470s can be used. In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470. The FC 47 function ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7 tools. FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. When the S7-400 is used, the ASM 470 is connected via the ET 200M. The ET 200M can also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 environment. FB 47 is available for PLCs 115U to 155U. Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs. On the hardware side, communication between ASM 470 and the S7-300 CPU is handled by a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data can be transferred with each read/write command. Galvanic isolation between SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensure layouts which are not as susceptible to interference. Figure 6-33 ASM 470 interface MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-39 Interfaces ASM 470 Shield connecting element (6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0) for 2 modules Shield connection terminal (6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0) Figure 6-34 Ordering data Table 6-16 SLG SLG MDS MDS Configurator for ASM 470 Ordering data for ASM 470 6GT2 002-0FA10 Interface ASM 470 for SIMATIC S7-300, without front connector Accessories 6GT2 080-2AA10 MOBY software with FC 47, FB 47 6-40 Description of ASM 470/FC 47 for MOBY-I German English 6GT2 097-3AL00-0DA1 6GT2 097-3AL00-0DA2 Description of ASM 470/FB 47 German Englisch 6GT2 097-3AL10-0DA1 6GT2 097-3AL10-0DA2 Stub lines and accessories See chapter 7.8. Front plug connector (1 per ASM 470), 20-pin with screw-type connection 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0 Shield connection terminal (1 per SLG cable) 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0 Shield connection element (1 per 2 ASM 470s) 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 470 Serial interface to the SLG Connection Via screw screw-type type terminals The front plug p g connector is not included. (See catalog (S l ST 70: 70 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0)) Line length (typ. max.) 1000 m/RS 422, depends on SLG SLGs which can be connected SLG 4x Interface for 24 V DC Via ASM 470 Software functions Programming With STEP7 function FC 47 or FB 47 for STEP5 (contained in MOBY software) FC 47 can be used with S7-300 and S7-400 FB 47 can be used with S5-115U/135U/155U Commands Read data from MDS, write data on MDS, and initialize MDS Dialog Supply pp y voltage g Yes Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Galvanic isolation between S7-300 and MOBY Restricted (100 kOhm between S7-300 and 24 V DC) Current consumption At U = 24 V DC (max.) 50 mA From SIMATIC S7 bus (max.) 100 mA Current consumption of the closed SLGs Max. of 600 mA for one SLG Max. of 300 mA per SLG when two SLGs are connected Power loss (typ.) 1W Ambient temperature During operation Horizontal SIMATIC layout 0° to +60° C Vertical SIMATIC layout 0° to +40° C During transportation and storage -40° to +70° C Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 40 x 125 x 120 Weight (approx.) 0.2 kg MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-41 Interfaces Wiring The ASM 470 is commissioned with the following steps. Mount module Mount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual. Note The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module is mounted. Front panel Warning The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off. The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470 and the inside of the front door with the related connection diagram. The SLGs must be connected to the ASM 470 as shown in the connection diagram. S+ S– Active E+ E– SLG 1 ! E+ E– Status and error indicators Figure 6-35 6-42 SLG 2 S+ S– Connection diagram The numbers for the connection are based on plug connector X1 located on the upper part of the housing. Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Wiring to the SLG The figure below shows a connection cable between ASM 470 and SLG. The colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See chapter 3.7.3. Front plug connector of ASM 470 (6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0) Cable with core sleeves White 4 (12) Brown 5 (13) Green 6 (14) Yellow 7 (15) Pink 8 (16) Grey 9 (17) SLG plug connector (socket) 6 1 4 5 2 3 (Shield) Cable shield bared Figure 6-36 Wiring of ASM 470 to SLG Shield connection See chapter 3.6. Lightning protection Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consideration of the entire system. Cabling from ASM to SLG See chapter 3.6. Configuration of ASM 470 for S7-300 under STEP7 Note Installation of MOBY requires that functional STEP7 software has been installed on the PC/PG. Installation and configuration of the ASM 470 in the SIMATIC is handled by an installation program. The installation program is included with the “MOBY software” product (6GT2 080-2AA10). Installation Installation is almost completely automatic. The specified steps during SETUP must be responded to. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-43 Interfaces FC 47 function During installation, the MOBY project “P7_MO01X” is set up in the directory “S7PROJ”. Using the SIMATIC Manager, the sample MOBY program can be processed or the FC 47 function can be copied to another project. The ASM 470 module is located in the hardware catalog under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of the SIMATIC S7. SIMATIC 300 SM 300 Spezial-300 MOBY ASM470 Figure 6-37 6-44 ASM 470 directory in the hardware catalog MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.7 ASM 724/ASM 754 Application area The ASM 724/754 interfaces are designed for the distributed configuration of identification systems for warehousing, logistics, distribution and assembly lines. The robust and functional housing can be mounted almost anywhere. Up to four read/write antennas can be connected and operated in pseudo parallel. When more than one SLA 71 is connected, the data are processed sequentially on the device. The MOBY wide-range power pack (6GT2 494-0AA00) can be used to supply the power on the ASM 724 and ASM 754. The read/write antenna (SLA 71) and stub lines must be ordered separately. The user has a choice of two interfaces. PROFIBUS-DP/V1 (ASM 754) RS 232/RS 422. Serial interface to the PC and PC-compatible controllers (e.g., SICOMP IMC) and to controllers of other manufacturers (ASM 724). Other operating systems on request. Figure 6-38 ASM 724/754 interface ASM 724 The ASM 724 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. Communication with the user is handled by a serial RS 232/RS 422 interface with the 3964R protocol. This makes it easy to connect PCs and controllers of other manufacturers to the MOBY E identification system. A C-library (MOBY API) with basic functions is available to PC users for their applications (Windows 98/NT 4.0). ASM 754 The ASM 754 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. Communication with the user is handled by the non-cyclic protocol service of PROFIBUS-DP/V1. The FC 45 function is available to SIMATIC S7-300/400 users for simple integration. The description of the PROFIBUS-DP/V1 implementation (see appendix of FC 45 description) is available to programmers of controllers of other manufacturers. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-45 Interfaces 6GT2 494-0AA00 PROFIBUS master 24 V DC S7-300 (FC 45) S7-400 (FC 45) PROFIBUSDP/V1 230 V AC Other master (FC of other mfg) 6GT2 491-1HH50 ASM_channel: Figure 6-39 6-46 1 2 3 4 MOBY power pack or other 24 V source 6GT2 391-1AH50 SLA SLA SLA SLA MDS MDS MDS MDS MOBY E: SLA 7x and MDS E6xx Configurator for ASM 724 and ASM 754 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-18 Ordering data for ASM 724/754 ASM 724 interfaces with serial RS 232/RS 422 interface; 3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and controllers of other manufacturers; for four SLA 71s 6GT2 302-2CE00 ASM 754 interfaces for use of MOBY E components via PROFIBUS-DP/V1, without filehandler; for four SLA 71s 6GT2 302-2EE00 Accessories: SLA 71 read/write antenna 6GT2 301-2BB00 Standard connection cable between SLA 71 and ASM 724, and ASM 754; length: 5 m 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna cable; 6GT2 391-1AH50; length: 25 m 6GT2 391-1BN25 Wide-range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/ 24 V DC; 2.2 A (24 V cable not included) 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack; 6GT2 494-0AA00; length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 RS 232 stub line between PC and ASM 724; can be fabricated up to 32 m based on length key (see chap. 3.7.4) 6GT2 391-0B... Plug connector for voltage (socket) for ASM 724 and ASM 754 6GT2 390-1AB00 PROFIBUS plug connector; 9-pin, submin. D plug connector for 2 stub lines 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 (for other connectors, see catalog ST 70 or IK PI) Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting of ASM 724/ASM 754 6GT2 390-0BA00 C-library for ASM 724 (MOBY API) Included on the “MOBY Software” CD (see chap. 7.1) Description of C-library (MOBY API) Included as pdf file on the “MOBY Software” CD (see chap. 7.1) FC 45 for ASM 754 Included on the “MOBY Software” CD (see chap. 7.1) Description of FC 45 For ASM 754 programming German English MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1 6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2 6-47 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-19 Technical data of the ASM 724/754 ASM 754 ASM 724 Serial interface to user PROFIBUS-DP/V1 RS 232/RS 422 Max. cable length See PROFIBUS configuration. 30/500 m Procedure/protocol EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS 3964R Connection 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type lock) Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition) 38.4 kbaud Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (non-cyclic) 238 bytes Serial interface to the SLA 9-pin, submin. D socket (screw-type lock) Cable length (ASM to SLA) Max. of 55 mm No. of SLAs connectable 4 SLA 71 devices Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS-DP/V1 master MOBY API: C-lib. for PC w. Windows 98/ NT 4.0 Function block SIMATIC S7 FC 45 – MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Dialog No No Digital inputs None Digital outputs None Voltage Connection plug 4-pin, M12 round plug connector (pin) Nominal value 24 V DC Perm. range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption 250 mA (without SLA) Max. switch-on current 1.1 A (without SLA) Ambient temperature Operation Transportation and storage –25° 5 to +55° 55 C (no condensation) –40° to +85 +85° C (no condensation) –40 Housing 6-48 Dimensions (L x W x H) 205 x 130 x 60 (without plug connector) Material Aluminum Color Anthracite MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-19 Technical data of the ASM 724/754 ASM 754 ASM 724 Mounting 4 M5 screws Optional: Top-hat rail mounting Tightening moment (at room temperature) 3 Nm Weight (approx.) 1300 g Protection rating IP 40 (higher rating on request) Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 30 g Vibration in. acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 1g 1.5 g MTBF (at +40° C) 1 ⋅ 105 hours Certification CE Pin assignment and switches PRE (9 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) ERR Plug conn. 1 to 4 to the SLA RxD Socket 1 2 3 4 + 12 V + send + receive Not used – receive – send Ground (0 V) + 24 V Not used Housing Cable shield RxD: SLG with command active PRE: Indication of “presence” channel during multiplex operation ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED (under preparation) Figure 6-40 Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Serial interfaces of ASM 724/754 to SLA 71 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-49 Interfaces PROFIBUS SERIAL ON: (green) 24 V present on ASM SF/BF: (red) System fault/bus error, RAM error ASM 724: flashes after switch-on, goes off after first real telegram DC 24 V ACT: (green) SF/BF ON This LED flashes briefly when a command is finished. ACT ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 V DC Pin Switches 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address1 Switch 1 ON: 20 Switch 2 ON: 21 2 1 3 4 : Switch 7 ON: 26 Example: PROFIBUS address = 84 (22 + 24 + 26) Switches 8: Interface2 ON: RS 422 OFF: RS 232 Switches 9: Firmware download ON: 3964R OFF: PROFIBUS-DP/V1 Switches 10: Procedure2 ON: 3964R OFF: Reserved for Lauf Switches 11, 12: Not used 1 2 Only for ASM 754 Only for ASM 724 Figure 6-41 6-50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing Ground + 24 V + 24 V Ground 1 2 3 4 PROFIBUS Socket Designation 1 Designation Not used Not used B–line (red) Request to send (RTS) Ground 5 V (M5) Potential 5 V (floating; 60 mA) Not used A-line (green) Not used Cable shield SERIAL 2 Socket RS 232 RS 422 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing Not used TxD (send) RxD (receive) Not used Ground (0V) Not used Not used Not used Not used Cable shield Not used –TxD –RxD Not used Ground Not used Not used +TxD +RxD Cable shield Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the user MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Dimensions (in mm) 205 130 Grounding bolt (M4) Figure 6-42 Dimensional drawing of ASM 724/754 with mounting holes Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting Item 3 Quantity 1 Floor plate 1 2 Profile section 1 3 Oval head screw (M5 x 10) 4 4 Washer (A5.3) 4 5 Countersunk screw (M4 x 10) 2 4 5 Designation 1 2 Figure 6-43 How to mount the adapter plate Note The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° on the floor plate before mounting if the situation requires. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-51 Interfaces 6.8 SIM Serial Interface Module 6.8.1 Overview Application area The primary application areas of the MOBY E SIM are data acquisition, trade and commerce, warehousing, logistics, assembly lines and tool identification. For acquisition support, development and pilotinstallation, the MIFARE Demokit is availabe. The SIM serial interface module is a general-purpose module for operation of MOBY E via a serial interface on any Computers PCs PLCs of other manufacturers Its sturdy housing permits use in rugged environments and makes it insensitive to many chemical substances. Layout and function SIM combines an ASM interface and an SLG read/write device in one housing. It is delivered with RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces. The following versions are available for MOBY E. SIM 70 ANT 0 SIM 70 ANT 1 SIM 72 All SIM models are operated with a 3964R procedure. The SIM is connected via a serial interface of the PC (models with processors starting at 80486SX) and run with the 3964R protocol. Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol. C libraries with functions based on the 3964R driver platform are available for fast and easy programming. Use of the C libraries makes it possible to run the SIM with applications under Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Other operating systems on request. 6-52 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces AT-comp. PC C library with 3964R driver RS 232 / RS 422 SIM 72 Plug connector Power pack S MOBY E MDS E611 Figure 6-44 Data structure of the MOBY E data memory MDS E6xx with SIM Example of a configurator for SIM MOBY E MDS E6xx data memories and the MIFARE card share the same protocol but use different access keys. The MDS has an 8-kbit EEPROM memory which is divided into 16 sectors (i.e., sectors 0 to 15). Each sector consists of four blocks. The block is 16 bytes in length and is the smallest addressable memory area on the MDS. With one exception, each sector consists of three blocks of user data (i.e., blocks 0 to 2) and a sector trailer (i.e., block 3). Sector 0 is the exception. It contains the card manufacturer data block in block 0 and can only be read-accessed. Access to the MOBY E MDS is protected by two keys (i.e., A and B) per sector with individual access conditions for each block of the sector. These keys and the individual access conditions must be specified and stored in the appropriate sector trailer when the card is personalized. With MOBY E data memories, key A is reserved and is not available for programming. All MOBY E SIMs use this key. Key B is available for user programming. This permits the SIM to be used to access general MIFARE data memories. The transport key is required to switch the SIM to another B key. This is 0xB0B1B2B3B4B5. Note Key assignment and access conditions can only be changed with the SIM. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-53 Interfaces 8192-bit EEPROM Manufacturer’s data Block 0 User data Block 1 Sector 0 Key A (0) Block 2 Access conditions (0) Block 3 Sector 1 Sector trailer 0 Key B (0) Block 4 User data Block 5 . . . Key A (1) Block 6 Access conditions (1) Block 7 Sector trailer 1 Key B (1) Block 60 User data Block 61 Key A (15) Block 62 Access conditions (15) Block 63 Key B (15) Sector 15 Sector trailer 15 16 sectors Figure 6-45 6-54 4 blocks per sector = 64 blocks 16 bytes per block = 1024 bytes 47 user data blocks = 752 bytes Keys A and B = 6 bytes each Access conditions = 4 bytes Data structure of the MOBY E MDS (MIFARE) with SIM MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces The MOBY interfaces which use an SLG with the MDS (e.g., ASM 400, ASM 450, ASM 470, and so on) only access the user data via addresses. The figure below shows the assignment of ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS. ASM Addressing Decimal MDS Structure Hexadecimal Block 0 Manufacturer’s data User data 0 15 0000 000F Block 1 16 31 0010 001F Block 2 Block 3 Key A Access Key B 32 47 0020 002F Block 4 48 63 0030 003F Block 5 64 79 0040 004F Block 6 . . . . . . Block 7 User data Key A Access Key B Figure 6-46 704 719 02C0 02CF Block 60 720 735 02D0 02DF Block 61 Key A 736 751 02E0 02EF Block 62 Access Block 63 Key B User data Assignment of the ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS Field data of the MDS and SIM The following tables provide the field data of all MOBY E components of MDS and SIM. All technical data are typical data, based on an ambient temperature of 0° to +50° C, a supply voltage of 22 to 27 V DC, and metal-free surroundings. Due to manufacturing and temperatures, tolerances of 20% are permitted. The field data are subject to additional tolerances when the entire voltage range on SIM from 12 to 30 V DC and/or the entire temperature range of MDS and SIM is/are utilized. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-55 Interfaces Table 6-20 Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without the influence of metal MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233 MDS E624 SIM Length of the transmission window in mm (L) SIM 70 ANT 0 (Ld) --- --- 4 12 SIM 70 ANT 1 (Ld) 605 805 --- 38 SIM 72 (Lx)2 (Ly)2 755 505 905 605 --- 60 40 Width of the transmission window in mm (W) SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 24 5 (12)1 SIM 70 ANT 1 24 32 --- 15 (38)1 30 20 36 24 --- 24 16 (Bx)2 (By)2 SIM 72 Working distance in mm (Sa) SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 0 to 6 0 to 8 SIM 70 ANT 1 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25 SIM 72 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 30 Limit distance in mm (Sg) SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 6 15 SIM 70 ANT 1 70 100 --- 40 SIM 72 70 100 --- 40 1 2 3 4 5 The width (W) contained in parentheses only applies to static MDS operation. See also figure 6-64 for field geometry. MDS E623 with SIM 70 ANT 0 only in static operation In static operation, a maximum medien deviation of + 2 mm is permitted. Reduction by approx. 15% when the MDS enters the transmission window diagonally. See also figure 3-1. Note For effects of metal on the transmission window, see sections 3.4.2 and 3.4.3. Table 6-21 6-56 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E623 MDS E624 SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- > 30 mm > 50 mm SIM 70 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SIM 72 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-22 Minimum distance from SIM to SIM SIM 70 ANT 0 SIM 70 ANT 1 SIM 72 SIM 70 ANT 0 > 200 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm SIM 70 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm SIM 72 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm Note Adherence to the values specified in table 6-22 is essential. The inductive fields may be affected if the values are underranged (i.e., data transmission time would increase to an incalculable amount of time or a command would be aborted with errors). MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-57 Interfaces 6.8.2 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation The 15-pole submin D plug connector (i.e., pin) is used for the following purposes. The voltage supply of SIM The connection to the PC/computer The connection of the inputs and outputs Table 6-23 Overview of the SIM plug connector allocation Meaning Pin RS 232 Interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 RS 422 Interface 7 8 14 15 13 12 – – TxD RxD GND I1 1 5 1 9 2 + 24 V 0V (ground) Not used Voltage supply of the SIM module (12 to 30 Volt) 10 11 0V (ground) DPA0 3 4 For power output (Power output 24 V, max. of 0.5 A ohmic load) 4 5 3 6 7 0V (ground) DI0 1 DO0 2 3 DO1 2 DO2 2 For DO (Transmit Data) (Receive Data) (Signal ground) (Input for interface switchover only) (Only for RS 232) D+ E+ DEGND6 I1 1 5 (Send) (Receive) (Send) (Receiveg) (Connect signal ground if necessary.) (Input for interface switchover only) 0V (ground) DI0 1 DO0 2 3 DO1 2 ––– For DO Logical “0”: –2 V < log 0 < 5 V /logical “1”: 12 V < log 1 < 33 V Level and load correspond to RS 232; Ri min = 3 kΩ (logical “0” = < –5 V on 3 kΩ / logical “1” = 5 V on 3 kΩ) Output DPA0 and DO0 are parallel in function. Logical “0”: < 2 V on 50 Ω / logical “1”: 22 V on 50 Ω Interface switchover RS 232: I1 = logical 0/RS 242; I1 = logical 1 Correct recognition requires that GND-SIM and GND-PC be connected with each other. 6-58 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Suggested cabling Shielded data cables must be used. Standard cable recommended by Siemens: LiYC11Y, shielded Wiring varies depending on the ambient conditions and the cable lengths. X Y SIM Optional: Switch; proximity switch or similar Only one connection cable 6 to 15-core, shielded Customer’s distributor box (IP 65), possibly with power pack Computer connection 4-core, shielded Figure 6-47 Computer or PC Installation with one connection cable for rugged environments X Y SIM Computer connection 4-core, shielded Optional: Switch; proximity switch or similar Computer or PC Voltage supply 2-core 2-core 24 V DC 230 V AC Figure 6-48 Installation with several connection cables on the SIM plug connector MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-59 Interfaces PC Test cable for DI/DO and power supply, 5 m long (6GT2 391-1DH50) SIM SIM PC RS 232 X Y C library with 3964R driver and demo (table 7-1) Adapter Plug connector power pack (6GT2 090-0HB00) Figure 6-49 6-60 Installation with test cable and plug connector power pack (see chap. 3.7.3) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Voltage supply Table 6-24 Voltage supply of SIM Nominal Value 24 V DC Permissible range 12 to 30 V DC Uripple fripple 1 Vss 0 < f < 1 MHz (measured on plug connector of SIM) Current consumption Startup current 700 mA At 24 V and room temperature Without With DO DO 180 mA 700 mA At 12 V and room temperature Without With DO DO 330 mA 1.03 A The voltage can be supplied via cores of the data cable or via a separate cable. Remember the voltage drop on the supply cable, and check the input voltage on SIM during commissioning. The permissible cable length is usually shorter than 1000 m. The length depends on the current consumption of SIM and the ohmic resistance of the connection cable. The following table provides an overview of permissible cable lengths. Table 6-25 SIM cable configuration Conductor Cross Section in mm2 Conductor Diameter in mm Resistance in Ω/km 1 Max. Cable Length in m2 DO Unloaded DO Max. of 500 mA 0.07 0.3 550 40 30 0.2 0.5 185 120 85 0.5 0.8 70 310 230 0.8 1.0 50 440 320 1.5 1.4 24 920 660 1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conductors. A single wire has half the resistance. 2 Use of these conductor cross sections requires crimp contacts (not included) in the SLG connection plug. Field with gray background: Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y (e.g., 6 x 0.25, shielded). The cable is available from Siemens under the order number 6GT2 090-0A... MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-61 Interfaces Standard cabling with RS 232 interface SIM Computer 25-pin sub D plug connector: Cable length max. of 30 m 3 TxD 2 RxD 7 GND 1) RxD TxD TxD 9-pin sub D plug connector: RxD 3 TxD 2 RxD 5 GND 2) Pin 1 Pin 1 1) Apply shield to plug connector housing 2) Input 1 (pin 12) open = RS 232 interface Figure 6-50 Standard cabling for computer/SIM and RS 232 SIM is equipped with a standard RS 232 (V.24) interface with the signal lines on pins 14 and 15. V.24 control lines (e.g., DSR, DTR, RTS and CTS) are not supported by SIM. Data acknowledgment is performed at the procedure level. Standard cabling with RS 422 interface SIM Computer Cable length max. of 1000 m 1) E– TxD D– RxD D+ E+ 2) Pin 1 1) Apply shield to plug connector housing 2) Jumper between pin 1 and pin 12 = RS 422 interface Figure 6-51 Standard cabling for computer/SIM and RS 422 Input I1 (pin 12) is used to switch from interface RS 232 to RS 422. Logical 0 is RS 232. Logical 1 is RS 422. 6-62 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces DI/DO cabling with voltage supply and interface switchover SIM 230 V AC Switch, proximity switch 24 V DC + – DPA0 Relay, small motor, lamp or similar DI0 E1 1) Imax = 500 mA 1 Pin 1 Cable length max. of 100 m (shielded or unshielded) 1) Input 1 (pin 12) is only used for the interface switchover and is not available to the user for applications. Logical 0 is RS 232. Logical 1 is RS 422. Figure 6-52 DI/DO cabling with voltage supply ! What to do if nothing works Warning If DPA0 (i.e., power output) is used, PIN 10 must be used as ground reference. Otherwise the SIM may be destroyed. a) Check supply voltage directly on the SIM plug connector with a measuring device. b) Check cabling to the computer. Do SIM and computer have the same physical interface? Is the polarity of the connection cables (i.e., RS 232 or RS 422) correct? Are the data cables wired correctly? RxD of SIM must be connected to TxD of the computer and vice versa. Is the cable shield applied correctly? Error messages Error messages are described in the individual programming guides. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-63 Interfaces 6.8.3 Programming the SIM Module with the 3964R Procedure Telegrams can only be transmitted with the 3964R procedure. This procedure ensures secure data transmission for a point-to-point connection. The following C libraries and programming guides which can be ordered separately are available to the user for the computers. C libraries CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) MOBY API (Windows 98/NT 4.0) Programming guide for CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0), German CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0), English MOBY API (Windows 98/NT 4.0 on the “MOBY Software” CD as pdf file) MOBY API is a C-library with only the basic functions (read, write, initialize). It is available to users for their PC application. PC users: 3964R driver for Windows 95/98/NT 4.0 users; uses PC interfaces 1 and/or 2. With additional hardware, 4 interfaces can be operated with the driver. Can be run on PC models starting with processor 80486SX with serial interface and a Windows 95/98/NT 4.0 operating system. The communication specifications are described in the Windows programming guidelines (CCT32, Windows 95/NT) for computers which do not use Windows (e.g., Unix). Interface presetting Parameter Presetting Transmission speed 9600 bit/sec Bits per character 8 data bits Parity Odd Stop bits 1 Priority PC = master Depending on the operating system being used, these interface parameters must be set in the C-library via system control (for Windows 95/NT, button: 3964R/Lauf). 6-64 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.8.4 SIM 70 ANT 0 Ordering data Technical data Figure 6-53 SIM 70 ANT 0 Table 6-26 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 0 Serial interface SIM 70 ANT 0 6GT2 305-0AA00 15-pole submin D special plug connector (socket) for IP 65 6GT2 390-1AA00 SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length of 5 m) 6GT2 391-1DH50 Plug-in power pack, primary: 90 V to 264 V AC secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for SIMRS 232 test cable 6GT2 090-0HB00 Software See section 7.1 Programming guide See appendix A Table 6-27 Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 0 Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422 Transmission speed 9600 baud Procedure 3964R (C library contains driver for PC) Plug-in connection 15-pole submin plug connector (pin on device side) Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422 30 m (shielded), RS 232 Antenna line length, max. 0.45 m MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-65 Interfaces Table 6-27 Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 0 Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access rights, multitag (see programming guide) Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other manufacturer The following C libraries are available for the PC. CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) MOBY API (Windows 98/NT 4.0) Digital input (Ri = 10 kΩ) Via 15-pole submin D plug connector Number 1 Input voltage for Logical “0” Logical “1” – 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1 12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1 Non-floating Yes Digital outputs Via 15-pole submin D plug connector Number 1 (power output) Imax = 500 mA At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V) Input voltage for Logical “0” Logical “1” < 2 V at 50 Ω 22 V at 50 Ω (Imax) Galvanic isolation No Short-circuit proof Yes Inductive interface to the MDS (SLG integrated) Read/write distance, max 15 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Supply voltage 24 V DC 12 to 30 V DC 1 Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption at room temperature Without DO 700 mA, typical 330 mA, typical 180 mA, typical Switchon current, brief Operation (at 12 V) Operation (at 24 V) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40° C) Housing, dimensions in mm 6-66 For antenna head (∅ x weight x length) M18 x 1.5 x 50 For electronics without plug connector (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color (Antenna) (SIM housing) Anthracite with orange head Anthracite Material (Antenna) (SIM housing) Crastin Polyamide 12 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-27 Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 0 Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 SIM housing IP 65 (with special plug connector, 6GT2 390-1AA00) Antenna IP 67 (front) (9 to 200 Hz)2 (200 to 500 Hz)2 Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2 Mounting of the SIM 2 M5 screws Tightening moment (at room temperature) 2 Nm Mounting of the antenna 2 plastic nuts, M18 x 1.5 Ambient temperatur During operation During transportation and storage -25° C to + 70° C -40° C to + 85° C Weight, approx. 510 g 1 2 Voltage measured on SIM Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values. They should not be allowed to occur on a continuous basis. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-67 Interfaces Definition of distance D Da Db Da 200 mm Db 200 mm The SIM electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 6-54 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 0 Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 52 5 Cable length 0.45 m Antenna head 50 M18 Fine threading Pitch 1.5 160 Antenna side 5.5 MOBY E A 80 24 ANT 0 5 Top view of antenna head 40 View A 26 12 Figure 6-55 6-68 33 Dimensional diagram of SIM 70 ANT 0 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Transmission window Ld L (Sa, min) 1 L (Sa, max) = Ld sg sa View of top 1 View of side Figure 6-56 At Sa,min, the transmission window may increase in comparison to the standard configuration. Transmission window of SIM 70 ANT 0 Transmission window: To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be positioned within this field. ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ a MOBY E ANT 0 a = 10 mm b = 10 mm Metal-free space with flush installation Note: The limit and operating distances are reduced when the metal-free space is not adhered to. Figure 6-57 FCC information 10 10 Metal-free space ANT 0 Metal-free space for SIM 70 ANT 0 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 70 ANT 0 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM70ANT0 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-69 Interfaces 6.8.5 SIM 70 ANT 1 Ordering data Technical data 6-70 Figure 6-58 SIM 70 ANT 1 Table 6-28 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 1 Serial interface SIM 70 ANT 1 6GT2 305-0AB00 15-pole submin D special plug connector (socket) for IP 65 6GT2 390-1AA00 SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length of 5 m) 6GT2 391-1DH50 Plug-in power pack, primary: 90 V to 264 V AC secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for SIMRS 232 test cable 6GT2 090-0HB00 Software See section 7.1. Programming guide See appendix A. Table 6-29 Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 1 Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422 Transmission speed 9600 baud Procedure 3964R (C library contains driver for PC) Plug-in connection 15-pole submin plug connector (pin on device side) Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422 30 m (shielded), RS 232 Antenna line length, max. 0.45 m MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-29 Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 1 Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access rights, multitag (see programming guide) Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other manufacturer The following C libraries are available for the PC. CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) MOBY API (Windows 98/NT 4.0) Digital input (Ri = 10 kΩ) Via 15-pole submin D plug connector Number 1 Input voltage for Logical “0” Logical “1” – 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1 12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1 Non-floating Yes Digital outputs Via 15-pole submin D plug connector Number 1 (power output) Imax = 500 mA At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V) Input voltage for Logical “0” Logical “1” < 2 V at 50 Ω 22 V at 50 Ω (Imax) Galvanic isolation No Short-circuit proof Yes Inductive interface to the MDS (SLG integrated) Read/write distance, max 100 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Supply voltage Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 12 to 30 V DC 1 Current consumption at room temperature Without DO Switchon current, brief Operation (at 12 V) Operation (at 24 V) 700 mA, typical 330 mA, typical 180 mA, typical 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40° C) Housing, dimensions in mm For antenna head (L x W x H) 75 x 75 x 20 For electronics without plug connector (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color (Antenna) (SIM housing) Anthracite Anthracite Material (Antenna) (SIM housing) Polyamide 12 Polyamide 12 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-71 Interfaces Table 6-29 Technical data of SIM 70 ANT 1 Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 65 (with special plug connector, 6GT2 390-1AA00) SIM housing Antenna IP 67 1g 1.5 g Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2 Mounting of the SIM 2 M5 screws Mounting of the antenna 2 M5 screws Tightening moment (at room temperature) 2 Nm Ambient temperatur During operation During transportation and storage -25° C to + 70° C -40° C to + 85° C Weight, approx. 620 g 1 2 Transmission window (9 to 200 Hz)2 (200 to 500 Hz)2 Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Voltage measured on SIM Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values. They should not be allowed to occur on a continuous basis. ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ Transmission window MDS Sg Sa View of side SIM 70 ANT 1 L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa,min) Figure 6-59 6-72 1 View of top 1 At Sa,min, the transmission window may increase in comparison to the standard configuration. Transmission window of SIM 70 ANT 1 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Metal-free space Metal-free space with flush mounting: a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metal base) Figure 6-60 FCC information Metal-free space of SIM 70 ANT 1 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 70 ANT 1 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM70ANT1 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-73 Interfaces Definition of distance D Da SIM 70 ANT 1 SIM 70 ANT 1 Db Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm SIM 70 ANT 1 Figure 6-61 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 1 Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions 52 Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 5 Cable length 0.45 m 5.5 5 160 5 75 20 5.5 View of top of antenna 5 A 80 40 View A 26 12 Figure 6-62 6-74 33 Dimensional diagram of SIM 70 ANT 1 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces 6.8.6 SIM 72 Ordering data Technical data Figure 6-63 SIM 72 Table 6-30 Ordering data for SIM 72 Serial interface SIM 72 6GT2 305-0CA00 15-pole submin D special plug connector (socket) for IP 65 6GT2 390-1AA00 SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length of 5 m) 6GT2 391-1DH50 Plug-in power pack, primary: 90 V to 264 V AC secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for SIMRS 232 test cable 6GT2 090-0HB00 Software See section 7.1 Programming guide See appendix A Table 6-31 Technical data of SIM 72 Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422 Transmission speed 9600 baud Procedure 3964R (C library contains driver for PC) Plug-in connection 15-pole submin plug connector (pin on device side) Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422 30 m (shielded), RS 232 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-75 Interfaces Table 6-31 Technical data of SIM 72 Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access rights, multitag (see programming guide) Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other manufacturer The following C libraries are available for the PC. CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) MOBY API (Windows 98/NT 4.0) Digital inputs (Ri = 10 kΩ) Via 15-pole submin D plug connector Number 2 Input voltage for Logical “0” Logical “1” – 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1 12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1 Non-floating Yes Digital outputs Via 15-pole submin D plug connector Number 1 (power output) Imax = 500 mA At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V) Input voltage for Logical “0” Logical “1” < 2 V at 50 Ω 22 V at 50 Ω (Imax) Galvanic isolation No Short-circuit proof Yes Inductive interface to the MDS (SLG integrated) Read/write distance, max 100 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Supply voltage 24 V DC 12 to 30 V DC 1 Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption at room temperature Without DO 700 mA, typical 330 mA, typical 180 mA, typical Switchon current, brief Operation (at 12 V) Operation (at 24 V) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40° C) Housing, dimensions in mm For electronics without plug connector (L x W x H) 6-76 160 x 80 x 40 Color Anthracite Material Polyamide 12 Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP 65 (with special plug connector, 6GT2 390-1AA00) Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g (9 to 200 Hz)2 (200 to 500 Hz)2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Table 6-31 Technical data of SIM 72 Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2 Mounting of the SIM 2 M5 screws Tightening moment (at room temperature) 2 Nm Ambient temperatur During operation During transportation and storage -25° C to + 70° C -40° C to + 85° C Weight, approx. 550 g 1 2 Voltage measured on SIM Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values. They should not be allowed to occur on a continuous basis. Transmission window ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ Transmission window MDS View of side Sa Sg SIM 72 70 Standard configuration: Lengthwise x-axis (Lx) ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ M L (x, Sa, max) = Lx L (x, Sa, min) 1 1 View of top L (y, Sa, min) 1 L (y, Sa, max) = Ly At Sa,min, the transmission window may increase in comparison to the standard configuration. Figure 6-64 Transmission window SIM 72 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-77 Interfaces Metal-free space Metal h h = Physical height of SIM Metal b b a a a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm Figure 6-65 FCC information Metal-free space of SIM 72 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 72 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM72 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 6-78 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Interfaces Definition of distance D Y SIM 72 Y Da X SIM 72 X Db Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm Y SIM 72 X Figure 6-66 Distance D: SIM 72 Dimensions (in mm) 40 80 5 X 70 Y 160 90 5.5 A 5 View A 26 12 Figure 6-67 33 Dimensional diagram of SIM 72 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6-79 Interfaces 6-80 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7 7-1 Accessories 7.1 MOBY Software Starting with version 3.0, the “MOBY Software” product is delivered on CD. It includes all function blocks and drivers for MOBY. The “readme” file in the main directory of the CD offers a short description of the programs. FB 240: Function block for ASM 450; MOBY on PROFIBUS-DP with SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS-DP) FB 250: Function block for ASM 400 FB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The call interface of this function block is almost identical to that of FB 250. See the description of FB 250 for programming the ASM 440. FC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment. Be sure to read the “Read_me” file in the FC 44 directory carefully. The description of FC 44 for ASM 450 is available for operation of ASM 450. FC 45: S7 function for the ASM 754 Function FC 47 for ASM 470 FB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5-115U to 155U. It permits the ASM 470 to be used in a SIMATIC S5 environment with an ET 200M. Loading program for ES 030 and a master device file for connection of the ES 030 to PROFIBUS-DP Test and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (e.g., “read from MDS”, “write to MDS” and so on) on a PC (Windows). MOBY modules ASM 420 or SIM are connected by a serial interface cable to the PC (i.e., COM1 or COM2). Brief explanations of the individual directories in German or English. Cf. “les_mich.txt” or “read_me.txt”. 3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT C-library CCT32 for Windows 95/NT 4.0 C-library MOBY API for Windows 98/NT 4.0 Current release of MOBY documentation in pdf format Tools: Useful programs for MOBY configuration 7-2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories Complete MOBY documentation Function blocks for SIMATIC S5 Functions for SIMATIC S7 C-libraries and 3964 R drivers PROFIBUS device master files Aid programs for the configuration Figure 7-1 Software products/ function blocks/ drivers Program directories of “MOBY software” (version V 3.0) The applicable software must always be purchased once for every SIMATIC controller or for every PC on which the MOBY software is run. Although the price of the function block is included when an interface is purchased, the function block must be ordered with a separate item in the “BZ”. For the environment’s sake, only as many function blocks should be ordered as programmable controllers used in the system. When ordering with a separate “BZ”, the function blocks are only free of charge when the number of the original “BZ” is specified. When a function block is required but no device is ordered, the price indicated in the price list will be charged. The agreement pertaining to the use of one-time-purchase software products applies. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-3 Accessories C-library CCT32 The import library is written in C++. The following functions are supported. Read MDS Initialize MDS Write MDS Password protection and access rights Multi-tag recognition Personalization of the cards (only with the hardware of the MIFARE demo kit) Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol. For a description of the functions, see applicable programming instructions. See also appendix A. In addition, the C library Windows 95/NT contains a simple demo program. C-library MOBY API The import library is written in C++. The following functions are supported. Read MDS Initialize MDS Write MDS Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol. The programming guide is available as a pdf file on the “MOBY Software” CD. Ordering data Table 7-1 Ordering data of MOBY software Order No. MOBY software 7-4 6GT2 080-2AA10 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories 7.2 Module Rack BGT 4/BGT 8 The BGT 4/BGT 8 module racks consist of an attractive housing in which the module rack, power pack and backplane bus are installed. The following MOBY interfaces can be used in one module rack. ASM 420 Features Attractive, partially painted housing including module rack and power pack Available in 2 models (i.e., for 4 modules and for 8 modules) Integrated voltage supply (230 V AC, 24 V DC; 10 A) Integrated fan Internal bus wiring for 4 interfaces Plug connector PCB with 4 or 2 x 4 serial interfaces Maximum of 8 ASMs can be connected. Can be used with several physically different interfaces Multiplex operation with TTY, RS 485 and PROFIBUS-DP interfaces can be parameterized via plug-in PCB. Ordering data Table 7-2 Ordering data for BGT 4/BGT 8 Order No. BGT 4/BGT 8 module rack with power pack (without dummy covers) For 4 ASM 420 For 8 ASM 420 6GT2 090-0KA00 6GT2 090-0LA00 Description of the 4/8-module rack German 6GT2 097-3AK00-1EA1 English 6GT2 097-3AK00-1EA2 Dummy cover for module rack 6GT2 090-0LA10 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-5 Accessories BGT 4 BGT 8 Plug-in card with sub D sockets for serial interface Integrated power pack MOBY interfaces Technical data Figure 7-2 BGT 4/8 module rack Table 7-3 Technical data of BGT 4/BGT 8 Supply voltage Via internal power pack Primaryy Secondary 230 V AC, 50 to 60 Hz Length of the power supply cable (approx.) 2.8 m 24 V DC, 10 A Power pack classification Overvoltage resistance Safety of data processing equipment VDE 0160/2 VDE 0805, EN 60950 including electrical office machines Interference suppression of HF devices VDE 0871/B, EN 55022/B Plug connector PCB Connections 4 sub D sockets Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm BGT for 4 interfaces BGT for 8 interfaces 257 x 147 x 315 Material Steel plate Protection rating in acc. w. IEC 529 IP20 364 x 147 x 315 Ambient temperature 7-6 During operation 0° to +55° C During transportation and storage -40° to +70° C MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories 7.3 Plastic Housing for ASM The following MOBY interfaces can be used in the plastic housing. ASM 420 This housing is designed for desk and wall mounting. The voltage supply for the electronics is provided by a 230 V plug-in power pack. The power pack supply one ASM and the connected SLG. Connections to the user and to the SLG are subminiature D plug connections. Ordering data Table 7-4 Ordering data for plastic housing for ASM Order No. Technical data Desktop housing for ASM 420 (including power pack) 6GT2 090-0MA00 Desk-top housing (without power pack) 6GT2 090-0MA10 Plug connector power pack 6GT2 090-0HB00 Plug-in line for PC RS 232; 5 m 6GT2 091-1BH50 Table 7-5 Technical data of plastic housing for ASM Voltage supply Via internal power pack Primaryy Secondary 230 to 240 V AC, 50 Hz Length of the connection cable 2m 24 V DC, 1.2 A Connections SLG 9-pin sub D (from ASM) PC 25-pin sub D DI/DO 2 9-pin sub D Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 140 x 40 x 222 Material ABS Protection rating in acc. w. IEC 529 IP20 Ambient temperature During operation 0° to +55° C During transportation and storage -40° to +70° C MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-7 Accessories Example: View of front with ASM 420 Back with plug connector power pack 222 40 SLG 140 X3: Serial Interface X1: DI0/DO0 Pin V.24 RS422 TTY Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 ––– R– –SE 1 Ground 1 Ground 2 TxD E+ –EM 3 RxD D+ +SE 5 DC 24V 5 DC 24V 7 GND E– ––– 6 DI 1 7 DA 0 14 ––– R+ +EM 9 DO 1 8 DE 0 15 ––– D– ––– 24 0 V (GND)* 25 +24 V* Figure 7-3 7-8 X2: DI1/DO1 * Other voltage supply Plug connector assignment and dimensions MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories 7.4 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply Description The MOBY wide-range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks with two DC outputs (socket connector, parallel circuited). Its robust construction features an aluminum housing which gives the finetuned system physical strength while protecting it from electromagnetic interference and providing it with optimal heat dissipation. A built-in current limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply against overload and ensures continuous short circuit resistance. The integrated overvoltage protection (SIOV) which is standard protects the connected electronics from excessively high voltage. Figure 7-4 Ordering data Table 7-6 MOBY wide-range power pack Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack Order No. Technical data MOBY wide-range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC/2.2 A; incl. 2 counterplugs for the output voltage 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V stub line for ASM 724, ASM 754; length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ Table 7-7 Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack Input Input voltage Nominal value Range Frequency Input current Efficiency Power connection Power failure backup Undervoltage switchoff Overvoltage protection MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 100 to 230 V AC 90 to 253 V AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 to 0.45 A 80% at full load 2 m power line with protective contact connector 10 msec Yes SIOV 7-9 Accessories Table 7-7 Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack Output Nominal output voltage Nominal output current Residual ripple Socket contacts 24 V DC 2.2 A 20 mVss Up to 160 kHz 50 mVss Greater than 160 kHz NTC Yes Startup current limitation Continuous short circuit protection Ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation -20 to +40 C (max. of +60 C; see notes on safety) -40 to +80 C Convection During transportation and storage Cooling General specifications Dimensions of power supply incl. mounting plate (L x W x H) in mm Weight Color 205 x 80 x 60 (without connection plug) Approx. 1000 g Anthracite Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission (EN 50081-1) Interference immunity (EN 50082-2) Class B in acc. w. EN 55022 EN 61000-4-2 Safety Certifications Electrical safety check CE, GS EN 60950/VDE 0805 and VDE 106 (part 1) 4 kV AC I, in acc. w. EN 60950 (VDE 0805) IP 65, in acc. w. EN 60529 (only when connected) Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary Protection class Protection rating Connector assignment 24 V output Output 1 and 2: Socket 1: Ground (0 V) 3 4 2 1 Socket 2: +24 V DC Socket 3: +24 V DC Socket 4: Ground (0 V) Figure 7-5 Connector assignment of 24 V output 7-10 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories Dimensions (in mm) 65 7.5 80 3 57 205 176 5 5 190 7.5 Figure 7-6 Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack Notes on safety ! Caution Do not open the devices or modify them. Non-adherence will invalidate CE certification and the manufacturer’s warranty. When installing the power pack, adhere to the applicable DIN/VDE regulations of your country. The application area of the power pack is limited to “information technology of electrical office equipment” as stated in the standard EN 60950/ VDE 0805. Devices may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety notes on this product, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices, systems and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards. The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and technical description and only in connection with devices and components recommended by Siemens. If devices and components of other manufacturers are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Correct operation of the product requires proper storage, setup and mounting, and careful operator control and maintenance. When installing, make sure that the power outlet socket can be easily accessed. During operation, the housing may heat up to +40° C. This is no cause for concern. However, at an ambient temperature of more than +40° C, be sure to cover the power pack (power pack must still receive sufficient ventilation) so that people cannot touch the hot housing. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-11 Accessories 7.5 Wide-Range Plug Connector Power Pack The MOBY wide-range plug connector power pack is designed for use on single-phase alternating current networks with a DC output (socket plug connector). The primary-pulsed power supply is protected against overload with a built-in current limitation circuit and is permanently immune to short-circuiting. The integrated overvoltage protection protects the connected electronics from excessively high voltages. Technical data 7-12 Table 7-8 Technical data of the wide-range plug connector power pack Input voltage range 90 V to 264 V AC (wide-range input) Frequency range of the input voltage 47 Hz to 63 Hz Nominal input current 700 mA Nominal output voltage 24 V DC Nominal output current 1.25 A Basic load None Short-circuit immunity Yes Ambient temperature for transportation, storage and operation 0° to +40° C with 90% humidity, no condensation Power supply dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 105 x 68 x 39 (without connection plug) Output cable 2 x 0.75 mm / 2 m in length Primary plug connector can be changed Euro plug, UK plug, USA plug (included) Housing material Plastic (PPEV1) Color Black Weight Approx. 260 g CE Yes UL Yes Interference emission EN 55011, 55014 and 55022/B Interference immunity EN 61000-4-2 to -4-6 Electrical safety test In acc. w. EN 60950 Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary 3 kV AC Protection class 2 in acc. w. EN 60950 (VDE 0805) Protection rating IP 30 in acc. w. EN 60529 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-9 Ordering data for the wide-range, plug-in, power pack Order No. Wide-range, plug-in, power pack, 90 to 264 V AC/24 V DC; 1.25 A 6GT2 090-0HB00 Connection cable, RS 232 PC ↔ SIM 6GT2 391-1DH50 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-13 Accessories 7.6 MOBY STG E Hand-Held Terminal Application areas The STG E adds to the MOBY E identification system a powerful mobile hand-held terminal for applications in the areas of logistics, distribution and service. The service and test device (STG E) is an indispensable aid for commissioning and testing. All MOBY E data memories can be read and writeaccessed inductively. Figure 7-7 MOBY STG E hand-held terminal Setup and function The STG E mobile hand-held terminal consists of a basic device (PSION Workabout mx) and a plug-in compact read/write head. It has a housing which is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfaces (for EEPROM card, charging battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY E read head, battery charging interface including RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so on). The included MOBY software (memory card) provides service and test functions for reading, writing, etc. of all MOBY E data memories. Read data from the data memory Write data to the data memory Read and display the ID number of the data memory Present and edit the data in hexadecimal or ASCII format Enable/disable password protection Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own applications including a customized screen user interface for reading and writing data memories. Various development tools are available for the PC, and a large selection of accessories is available directly from PSION. New applications are opened up in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g., goods commissioning data can be recorded offline with the hand-held terminal or processed and forwarded to the PC/computer later). 7-14 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories Optional components See http //www.psion.com/industrial/ on the Internet. 3link adapter cable to the PC for easy exchange of data between PC and PSION Workabout mx PSION Workabout mx basic device with large function keys and numeric keyboard Additional memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory Docking station including high-speed charging device and software for convenient data exchange between PSION Workabout mx and PC System prerequisites The following prerequisites must be met when the library for SIBO ‘C’ (SIBO ‘C’ is the C developmental environment for the PSION Workabout) is used. PC The C development package for the PSION Workabout must be installed on the PC. This development package is available directly from PSION. See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/. Hand-held The PSION Workabout with wall bracket and power pack. Use of the STG E MOBY hand-held terminal is recommended. terminal PC cable You will need a 3link adapter cable from PSION for the connection to the PC. See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/. The cable is only required if not already included with the C development package. C library The following files are required: MOBY_E.H and MOBY_STG.LIB. They are supplied with the MOBY SIBO ‘C’ library from Siemens. Note In principle, applications can also be developed in the Basic programming language OVAL. However, you cannot use the MOBY library. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-15 Accessories Hardware The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces which you can use to write your own applications. TTL interface for use of a MOBY read head RS 232 interface (e.g. connection of a MOBY E-SIM) Graphical LCD screen Control keys: Contrast; display illumination on/off, and cursor keys Green LED: on when battery is being charged Additional Flash memory cards for storing large amounts of data Numeric input block with Enter key ASCII keyboard, shift and special function keys (Ctrl, ) LIF interface for connection of PC, printer and so on Figure 7-8 Hardware of the STG E If you are using another type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are also available. A few examples are listed below. Infrared interface Numeric keyboard and function keys 7-16 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-10 Ordering data of the STG E 6GT2 303-0AA00 STG E hand-held terminal, basic device (PSION Workaboutmx), with MOBY E read/write head, battery, standard software incl. STG functions on EEPROM card, user’s guide, without charging station Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal with 230 V AC, plug-in power pack 6GT2 303-1DA00 Accessories: Technical data MOBY E read/write head, 13.56 MHz, without software and description 6GT2 303-1AA00 Memory card with STG software and filehandler software for MOBY E, MOBY F and MOBY I, incl. user’s guide 6GT2 303-1CA00 C-library for MOBY E, MOBY F and MOBY I, for development of customer-specific screen dialogs, without development tools, incl. description 6GT2 381-1AB00 Extra battery Obtain from retailer. 2 AA batteries (NiCd, Ni-MH, alkali) Additional PSION components (e.g., 3link cable and C developmental user interface) Obtain from local dealer or PSION. (http://www.psion.com/industrial/) Table 7-11 Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal Hardware Processor NEC V30mx 27.68 MHz, 80C86-compatible RAM memory 2 Mbytes of which approx. 1.8 Mbytes can be used as desired ROM memory 2 Mbytes for operating system User program 256 Kbytes with MOBY service and test program Monitor screen Grafic LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, graystage scale, backlighting can be turned on Keyboard Alphanumeric with 57 keys Sound Piezo signal encoder Power supply NiCd battery pack with 2 type-AA cells (850 mAh) High-speed chargeable, automatic switch-off Operation time 20 hours (Read head inactive, display not lighted) 4.5 hours (Read head active, display not lighted) 10 hours (Read head inactive, display lighted) Interfaces LIF interface (LIF = Low Insertion Force) for battery charging and communication with PC and printer (3link cable not included) RS 232 and TTL interface for connection of a MOBY read head Security Locking mechanism for battery and program memory MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-17 Accessories Table 7-11 Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal Software Operating system EPOC/16 multitasking, graphics support, GUI interface, Interpreter similar to MS-DOS File management MS-DOS-compatible Integrated software MOBY service and test program, spread sheet calculation, data base, pocket calculator, communication MOBY STG program Read, write, delete MDS, read MDS-ID. Store MDS data and charge. Menus in German or English. Entry and presentation of data in ASCII or HEX. Technical Data Complete Device (Incl. Batteries) Read Head Dimensions 260 x 90 x 35 [[mm]] 90 x 64 x 35 [mm] [ ] Weight Approx. 440 g Approx. 110 g Temperature Operation: Storage: Relative humidity 0% to 90%, no condensation Protection rating IP 54 (protected against splashed water) Shock resistance Max. height of fall onto concrete: 1 m EMC EN 55022 Electrostatic, RF, EFT IEC 801-2; IEC 801-3; IEC 801-4 –20° to +60° C –25° 25° to +80° C (without battery) RF Read/Write Head MOBY E Max. read/write di distances 7-18 13.56 MHz (MIFARE) MDS type Distance in mm E611 E600 E624 E623 E623, installed in metal 30 18 10 5 3 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories 7.7 Acquisition Station ES 030-K Application area Acquisition station ES 030-K is a microprocessor-controlled terminal for general-purpose use in all sectors of industry. It offers several interfaces. This station is particularly suitable for use with the MOBY I, E, L and M identification systems and with barcodes to lessen the load of higher-level host systems. Its modular design permits configuration of functions and design to meet the requirements of individual applications. Features/layout Can be programmed as desired with PG and PC in programming language STEP5 Dialog or process-oriented with keys which can be assigned as desired Sturdy construction (IP54) for industrial environments (e.g., for control even when operator is wearing protective gloves) Flexible hardware layout Serial interfaces (i.e., TTY, RS 485, (RS 422), and V.24) for connection to higher-level computers, PLCs or printer with Lauf, 3964R, SINEC L1 and PROFIBUS-DP procedures Additional interfaces for MOBY I, MOBY E, MOBY L and MOBY M identification systems, barcode wands, scanners and swipe readers Integrated function blocks for frequently used functions With master/slave function for SINEC L1 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-19 Accessories OPTION LCD display 2 x 24 characters LCD display 4 x 20 characters Fluorescent display 2 x 20 characters Plug connector 4 Plug connector 3 Plug connector 2 Plug connector 1 OPTION OPTION Keyboard with 2 x 20 characters incl. cyrillic character Keyboard with 29 lighted keys key-operated switch Sealed keyboard with 30 keys, 30 LEDs key-operated switch Clock chip PLUG-IN-OPTION 1 Serial expansion interface TTY und V.242 8 digital inputs-/ 8 digital outputs 16 digital inputs2 MOBY M LBS-Interface MOBY I, MOBY E SLG-Interface MOBY I file handler SLG-Interface MOBY L SLG-Interface PLUG-IN-OPTION 1 MOBY M LBS interface MOBY I, MOBY E SLG-Interface MOBY I-file handler SLG-Interface MOBY L SLG-Interface Barcode wand PROFIBUS-DPInterface Serial Interface TTY and X.27 8 digital inputs-/ 8 digital outputs2 PROFIBUS-DPInterface Figure 7-9 1 2 Configurator of ES 030-K Each plug-in option is a hardware module requiring one slot on the ES 030-K. The options “serial expansion interface” and “16 digital inputs” can also be led out on plug connector 2 as a special version. 7-20 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-12 Ordering data ES 030-K Order No. ES 030-K acquisition station with TTY, X.27 serial interface on plug connector 1 8 DI + 8 DO on plug connector 2 6AW5 451- 3 Display Without Display LCD, 2 x 24 characters LCD, 4 x 20 characters Fluorescent display, 2 x 20 characters Fluorescent display, 2 x 20 characters (incl. cyrillic font) 0 1 2 3 5 Plug connector 3 Not used MOBY I, MOBY E interface 8 DI +8 DO 16 DI MOBY I file handler MOBY L interface MOBY M interface PROFIBUS-DP interface1 Serial interface (TTY, V.24) A C D E F L M P S Plug connector 4 Not used Barcode (incl. wand) MOBY I, MOBY E interface MOBY I file handler MOBY L interface MOBY M interface Barcode (without wand) PROFIBUS-DP interface1 A B C F L M N P Keyboard No keyboard Sealed keyboard, 30 keys, 30 LEDs Keyboard with 29 illuminated keys Loading kit for ES 030 1 0 2 3 6AW5 451-8AU Alternate: Preferably on plug connector 4 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-21 Accessories Technical data Table 7-13 Technical data of ES 030-K Microprocessor Clock pulse frequency 14.7 MHz Storage capacity (basic model) EEPROM 32 Kbytes = 16 K instruction RAM 128 Kbytes, battery-buffered for approx. 8 years (DB1-DB120) Command set (STEP5) Almost same as SIMATIC 100U (e.g., logical link operations, storage operations, load and transfer operations, time and counting operations, comparison operations, and processing operations Display 20 x 20-character fluorescent display or 2 x 20-character fluorescent display with cyrillic character set or 2 x 24-character LCD or 4 x 20-character LCD Digital inputs/outputs always included Always included 8 DI and 8 DO, floating Optional module 8 DI and 8 DO, floating Optional module 16 DI, floating Digital input Logical “0”: -2 to +2 V Logical “1”: 16 to 33 V (Ri = approx. 5 kΩ) Common ground of all DI Digital output Logical “1”: +24 V I = 100 mA I = 50 mA Short-circuit proof Common +24 V of all DO Serial interface 7-22 (plug connector 1) TTY or RS 485 Procedure 3964R, Lauf, SINEC L1 Speed 150 to 19200 baud Serial interface Interface module (plug connector 3) 20 mA single current Active/passive or V.24 Procedure: Lauf or 3964R Fieldbus PROFIBUS-DP (slave) certified in acc. w. part III of DIN 19245 Baud rate 9.6 kbaud to 1.5 Mbaud Connection 9-pin sub D plug connector on plug connector 4 (optionally on plug connector 3) Connectable barcode interface (max. of 2) Reading wand, swipe reader, hand-held laser scanner MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories Table 7-13 Technical data of ES 030-K MOBY E Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) MOBY I Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 70 ANT 0 SLG 70 ANT 1 SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 12 SLG 75 ANT 30 SLG 40/SLG 40-S SLG 41/SLG 41-S SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 MOBY L Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 52 Connection to SIMATIC S5 RS 485, V.24, TTY or SINEC L1 Keyboard Push-button keyboard 29 illuminated push-buttons 1 key-operated switch Sealed keyboard 30 keys, 30 LEDs 1 key-operated switch Power connection, normal 230 V AC, 10%; 48 to 62 Hz Optional 24 V DC (20 to 30 V) Current consumption Approx. 20 VA RAM/clock backup Backup battery for approx. 8 years Interference suppression Interference class B in acc. w. VDE 0871 Protection rating IP54 Ambient temperature Operation 0° to +40° C Transportation and storage -40° to +70° C Relative humidity Up to 95% Housing Die-cast zinc Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 180 x 280 x 95 Weight (approx.) 5 kg MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-23 Accessories ES 030-K ES 030-K Basic model with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, without display and without keyboard (e.g., to address a switch) Basic model with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, with fluorescent display and sealed keyboard and MOBY E, MOBY M, MOBY I or MOBY L for quality data Serial interface/RS 422 Serial interface TTY MDS SIMATIC S5/CP 544 MDS A0.1 MDS SLG SLG SLG ES 030-K ES 303-K (only slave) SIMATIC S5/S7 PC (master) PLC (master) D Ex: station 11 P PROFIBUS-DP L1 Type 2 Station 120 Station 14 Serial connection for barcode scanner DI/DO Serial connection for barcode scanner Manual input Type 3 L1 L1 DI/DO Manual input ES 030-K ES 030-K Basic model with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, with LCD, or fluorescent display and pushbuttons or sealed keyboard Basic model with serial interface (L1), with LCD, sealed keyboard, barcode wand L1 MOBY IInterface Serial interface PC/PLC A0.1 E0.0 MDS TTY/RS485 A0.0 1234567 SLG Barcode Figure 7-10 7-24 Sample configuration of ES 030-K MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories 7.8 Ordering Data for Accessories Plug-in lines Table 7-14 Ordering data for plug-in lines Order No. SLG plug connector Plug-in line, prefabricated Between ASM 400/420, ES 030-K and SLG Between ASM 410 and SLG Between ASM 470 and SLG Bent Straight 6GT2 091-0A -2A Plug-in line between ASM 450 and SLG, prefabricated, 2 m (standard) 6GT2 091-1CH20 Plug-in line between ASM 450 and SLG, prefabricated, 2.5 m to 20 m (optional) 6GT2 091-1C Plug-in line, 2-core for 24 V DC voltage supply of the ASM. Plug-in line has pin cable shoes on both ends, max. of 20 m 6GT2 091-0C Cable, without plug connector between ASM and SLG, type: 6 x 0.25 mm2 6GT2 090-0A 6GT2 091-0D -2D 6GT2 091-0E 2E RS 232 stub line 6GT2 391-0B between PC and ASM 724 (max. of 32 m) For length key see table 3-19. 24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack 6GT2 494-0AA00 (length: 5 m) 6GT2 491-1HH50 Standard connection cable between SLA 71 and ASM 724/ASM 754 (length: 5 m, not included with the SLA 71) 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna cable 6GT2 391-1AH50 (length: 25 m) 6GT2 391-1BN25 MOBY E SIM-RS 232 test cable with 6GT2 391-1DH50 connection line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length: 5 m) MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 7-25 Accessories Plug connectors Table 7-15 Ordering data for plug connectors Order No. Plug connector ASM-side 9-pin submin D plug connecASM-side, tor (pins) with screw-type lock for plug-in line between an ASM 400/420 and SLG/STG 1 each 1 package (10 each) 6GT2 090-0BB00 090 0BB00 ASM 450 connection plug for PROFIBUS-DP and voltage supply 6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0 MOBY E SIM plug connector 15-pole submin D special plug connector for IP 65 6GT2 390-1AA00 Plug connector ASM 450 SLG 6GT2 090-0BC00 6GT2 090-0BB10 Plug connector SLG-side, 6-pin DIN 43651 plug connector with socket contacts for crimping with angled g output. p Contact carrier must be secured at 7 locations. 1 each 1 package (10 each) 6GT2 090-0BA00 6GT2 090-0BA10 090 0BA10 With straight output 1 each 6GT2 090-0UA00 Plug connector 2-pin plug connector with screw-type connection for plug plug-in in line up to 11.5 5 mm diameter for 24 V DC connection (included with ASM 400) 6GT2 090-0NA00 Plug connector for voltage supply 6GT2 390-1AB00 (socket) for ASM 724 and ASM 754 Power pack PROFIBUS plug connector 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 9-pin, submin. D plug connector for 2 stub lines (for other plug connectors, see ST 70 or IK 10 catalog) Table 7-16 Ordering data for power packs Order No. Wide-range MOBY power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC/ 2.2 A; incl 2 counter-plugs for the output incl. voltage 6GT2 494-0AA00 Wide-range plug connector power pack 90 V to 264 V AC, 24 V DC, 1.25 A 7-26 6GT2 090-0HB00 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Accessories MDS mounting Table 7-17 Ordering data for MDS mounting Order No. Mounting bracket for MDS E600 6GT2 390-0AA00 Mounting bracket for MDS E6001/ MDS E611 6GT2 190-0AB00 Spacer for MDS E600/ MDS E611 6GT2 190-0AA00 1 Adapter floor plate Note Use of mounting bracket 6GT2190-0AB00 for MDS E600 only together with spacer 6GT2190-0AA00 Table 7-18 Ordering data for adapter floor plate Order No. Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting for ASM 724/ASM 754 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6GT2 390-0BA00 7-27 Accessories 7-28 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 A Documentation Descriptions, bound Table A-1 Ordering data for descriptions Order No. Description - ASM 400/401 German English 6GT2 097-3AB00-0DB1 9 6GT2 097-3AB00-0DB2 Description - ASM 410 German English 6GT2 097-3AC00-0DA1 9 6GT2 097-3AC00-0DA2 Description - ASM 420 German English 6GT2 097-3AF00-0DA1 9 6GT2 097-3AF00-0DA2 Description - ASM 450/FC 44 German English 6GT2 097-3AC30-0DA1 9 6GT2 097-3AC30-0DA2 Description - FC 45 German English 6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1 9 6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2 Description - ASM 470/FC 47 f SIMATIC S7 for German English 6GT2 097-3AL00-0DA1 6GT2 097-3AL00-0DA2 Description - ASM 470/FB 47 f SIMATIC S5 for German English 6GT2 097-3AL10-0DA1 6GT2 097-3AL10-0DA2 Description - FB 240 German English 6GT2 097-3AA10-0EA1 6GT2 097-3AA10-0EA2 Description - FB 250 for ASM 400/401 German English 6GT2 097-3AA00-0DA1 6GT2 097-3AA00-0DA2 Description - 3964R for Windows 95/NT (German/English) On “MOBY Software” CD Description - T3964R (stapled) German English 6AW5 450-4BX00-0K 6AW5 450-4BX00-1K Description - 4/8-module module rack German English 6GT2 097-3AK00-1EA1 6GT2 097-3AK00-1EA2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 A-1 Documentation Manuals Table A-2 Ordering data for manuals Order No. ES 030 030-K K manual German English Programming guides Table A-3 Ordering data for programming guides C/C++ library CCT32 for Windows 95/NT 1 German 6GT2 397-6AB00-0DA1 English 6GT2 397-6AB00-0DA2 Description – MOBY API 1 A-2 6AW5 451-6XX01-0K 6AW5 451-6XX01-1K On “MOBY Software” CD The communication specifications are described in the Windows programming guide for computers which do not use Windows (e.g., UNIX). MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 B Error Messages This chapter contains a list of MOBY I, E error messages. These messages are divided into three groups. B.1 Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section. These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS addressing. B.2 Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240 and FC 47) provide additional messages on the status of the hardware. These special messages are description in the second section. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 B-1 Error Messages B.1 General Errors The following error codes can occur during MOBY I, E operation. They are transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or via the red LED on the front plate. On most ASM modules, this LED always indicates the last error even when this error has already been corrected. On ASM 450, the error codes can also be optionally reported via PROFIBUS as device-related diagnoses. B-2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED Cause/Remedy 00 00 No error. Result is okay. – 01 See error code 0F. 01 02 Presence error. MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The MOBY command could only be executed partially. Read command: No data are supplied to the computer. Write command: The data memory which just left the field contains an incomplete data record. SIN1 0000 0003 → Sa (operating distance from SLG to MDS) not adhered to → Configuration error: Data block to be processed is too large (during dynamic operation). The next command (READ, WRITE or NEXT) is automatically related to the next MDS. Remark: The red error LED on the front plate shows error code 02. 02 02 Presence error 0005 → A mobile data memory has passed by the SLG and was not processed with a command or concluded with the NEXT command. → An INIT command was aborted with RESET. This error message cannot be transferred until the next command (read, write, status, RESET, DI/DO or NEXT). The command is not executed but causes this error message. The ASM executes the next command correctly again. Error 02 is reported immediately via external diagnosis. Remark: The red error LED does not distinguish between errors 01 and 02. See error code 01. 03 03 Error in the connection to the SLG 0040 → → → → Supply voltage of ASM < 20 V or not connected 24 V voltage has voltage drops. Fuse on ASM has triggered. Check wiring. Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or a cable break has occurred. → Hardware defect (ASM or SLG) → Another SLG in the vicinity is active. 04 04 Error in memory of the MDS 0041 The data memory has never been write-accessed or has lost its contents due to a battery failure. → → → → → 05 05 Initialize data memory with STG. With ASM: Call initialization command. Check battery of MDS or replace MDS (battery bit). Data memory is defective. Initialization was performed with wrong memory size. – Unknown command code in byte 2 of the telegram – MDS reports address error. Check telegram. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 0002/ 0004 B-3 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED 06 06 Cause/Remedy Field interference on SLG SIN1 0044 The SLG is receiving interference pulses from its surroundings. → External interference field. The interference field can be located with the inductive field indicator of the STG: → The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not correspond to configuration guidelines. → The connection cable to the SLG has malfunctioned, is too long or does not meet specifications. 07 07 Too many sending errors 0045 The MDS could not receive the command or the write data from the SLG correctly even after several attempts. → The MDS is located in the boundary area of the transmission window. → The data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference. 08 08 CRC sending error 0044 – The monitoring circuit has detected an error during sending. → Cause same as error 06 – The MDS reports CRC errors very frequently. → The MDS is located in the boundary area of the SLG. → The MDS and/or the SLG have a hardware defect. 09 09 Only for initialization. CRC error during acknowledgment receipt from MDS – → Cause same as error 06 0A 10 Only for initialization. MDS cannot execute INIT command. – → MDS is defective. 0B 11 Only for initialization. Timeout while initializing the MDS – → MDS is located exactly on the boundary of the transmission window. → The MDS is using too much current (i.e., defective). 0C 12 Memory of the MDS can no longer be written. 0046 → Memory of MDS is defective. → EEPROM-type MDS was write-accessed too often and has reached the end of its life. → An incorrect end address was parameterized for the INIT command. 0D 13 Address error (address area exceeded) → Specified address does not exist on the MDS: → Check and correct the command for telegram layout. → The status byte is not 00 for the command. 0E 14 ECC error The data could not be read from the MDS. 0002/ 0004 0047 → MDS data have been lost (i.e., MDS defective). → The MDS was not initialized with the ECC driver. → Initialize MDS. → MDS with EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been lost. → Replace MDS. → The MDS moved out of the field during a write-access. → The MDS is not positioned correctly. B-4 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED 0F 01 Cause/Remedy SIN1 Startup message The ASM always sends this message after every startup. A startup is considered performed after operational voltage is applied, after the front switch is activated, after a reset via plug connector X1 or after a bus error. The startup message is retained until the user issues a RESET command to the ASM. This enables the user to recognize when voltage returns to the ASM (i.e., readiness for operation). 10 16 NEXT command is not possible or is not permitted. 1043 → ASM is operating without the presence check. → ASM has already received a NEXT command. 11 17 Short circuit or overload of the 24 V outputs Next command must be a RESET command. → The affected output is switched off. → All 24 V outputs are switched off when a total overload occurs. → A reset can only be performed by turning the supply voltage off and on again. 12 18 Internal ASM communication error The connection to the MOBY processor has malfunctioned. Next command must be a RESET command. → Hardware of ASM is defective. → EMC interference 14 20 Internal ASM error Stack overflow. Next command must be a RESET command. → Turn 24 V supply off and on again. 15 21 Erroneous operational parameterization → Check switch on ASM. 16 22 The command cannot be executed with the current bus configuration. → Input or output areas are too small for the telegram length used. → Read or write command with excessive length used → Adjust bus configuration of the master module. 17 23 Handshake error Next command must be a RESET command.6 → The user set an incorrect bit in the command byte of the telegram during the handshake procedure. → Check user program and correct. 18 24 Only RESET command permitted → An error has occurred which must be acknowledged with a RESET command. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 B-5 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED 19 25 Cause/Remedy Previous command is active. SIN1 0042 A new command was issued to the ASM although the last command is still active. → An active command can only be terminated with a RESET command. → The new command is concluded with error 19 hex. The old command is executed by the ASM, and the finished message is reported after completion. 1A 26 PROFIBUS-DP error has occurred. → Bus connection has been interrupted (e.g., wire break or plug pulled). → Master no longer addresses the ASM. → The error is reported as soon as the bus connection is restored again. 1E 30 – The telegram does not have the correct format. – AB byte does not correspond to the user data length. → Check and correct the telegrams in the user program. – 1F 31 Communication with the MDS was terminated with a RESET. This error can only be reported back with a RESET command. – 20 (binary xx1x xxxx) 32 Not an error message 40 (binary x1xx xxxx) 64 80 (binary 1xxx xxxx) 128 1 2 00522 Only occurs when working with the ECC driver enabled. It indicates that the driver recognized and corrected a 1-bit error. The read/write data are okay. 00512 Not an error message This bit is normally always set. It is reserved for the status indication of a 2nd battery on the MDS. Not an error message Battery voltage of the MDS has fallen below the threshold value. Immediate replacement of the MDS is recommended. This status bit is always set for EEPROM-type MDSs. When SINUMERIK is involved, the battery message is provided in IDENTIFICATION without the “F” ID. To detect poor battery stats, the “fnr” field can be evaluated at one location for the entire system. 00502 SIN = Equivalent error number for SIM and ASM 420 in SINUMERIK operating mode When several states occur at the same time, the following sequence applies: 0052, 0050 and 0051. B-6 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Error Messages B.2 ASM-Related Errors B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250 The messages shown in table B-2 are indicated in data word 5 of FBDB. Table B-2 Error messages of FB 250 Error Message Bit 1 = “1”: Synchronization error Cause/Remedy FB 250 has received the result for a command which is not located in ZUWDB (i.e., not at this location). The pointer (ZUW) to ZUWDB may have been changed while a command was active. EMC effects have caused the ASM to execute another command than programmed by the user. → Check the entire SIMATIC system. Check the grounding concept. Bit 2 = “1”: FB 250 is synchronized (SYNCH) General communication capability with a channel module of the ASM 400 module. This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameterization. This takes place during the 1st RESET immediately after bootstrap loading of the programs and data blocks. When a RESET command does not function, the bit is not set or reset. ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB. Wrong address set on the ASM 400 ASM 400 is defective. → A RESET must always be performed after the sync bit is reset. Bit 4 = “1”: Parameterization error The “ADR” parameter does not contain the correct values. The “KAN” parameter is specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 1 or 2. The “TYP” parameter was specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5, and 6. The “ANW” parameter is not “0” or “1”. The command is not permitted in ZUWDB. Bit 5 = “1”: ASM error The exact ASM error is located in bits 8 to 15 of ANZ. If bits 8 to 15 = 0: The FB did not receive an acknowledgment from the ASM in time after command transfer. FB 250 was not called by the user within 4 seconds after command start (no cycle FB call). The user changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 to DW 24) - particularly DW 0/1. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 B-7 Error Messages Table B-2 Error messages of FB 250 Error Message Cause/Remedy Bit 6 = “1”: Loop counter monitor in FB 250 has been triggered. Time error The command data could not be or could not be completely transferred to the ASM 400. The ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. The “ADR” parameter may not correspond to switch setting S3 on the ASM 400. Length = 0 was transferred with a write command. The “AG” parameter is set incorrectly. The user has changed data in FBDB (particularly DW 0/1). → Check ASM 400 hardware, addressing parameterization and user program. Bit 7 = “1”: The command to the ASM 400 was repeated. Repetition error Error in BEST = 0 The command was not concluded correctly after command repetition (not an error). Error in BEST = 1 Communication malfunction between ASM and FB 250. Despite command repetition, the command still could not be executed correctly. When the repetition bit is set sporadically, all hardware must be checked. Special attention should be paid to the grounding concept. Bits 8 to 12 Error message as shown in table B-1 Bit 13 = “1” ECC offset was performed. Bit 14 = “1” Dialog battery has dropped below threshold value. Bit 15 = “1” RAM battery has dropped below threshold value. B-8 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Error Messages B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 The indication word for FC 47 is DBB 6/7. The indication word for FB 47 is DW 3. MOBY errors are indicated in DBB 6 or DL 3. Cf. table B-1. Internal errors of the function block are indicated in DBB 7 or DR 3. Cf. table B-3. The red LED does not flash for these error messages from FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified in hexadecimal format (i.e., HEX) and as fixed point numbers (i.e., DEC). Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 ANZ (RightHand Byte) Description 02 HEX/ Illegal command code or command parameter was entered. 02 DEC Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the command description. 06 HEX/ 06 DEC The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical. Internal processing error BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 07 HEX/ Synchronization error during execution of FB 47/FC 47 07 DEC Internal processing error BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 08 HEX/ 08 DEC The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical. 09 HEX/ The received or written user data are too long. 09 DEC ASM 470 not parameterized correctly Read command: The length specified for the data to be read is too ASM 470 not parameterized correctly BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. long. Maximum of 12 bytes is permitted. 10 HEX/ Read or written user data length too short. User data length is 0 bytes. 10 DEC Internal processing error BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 17 HEX/ The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly. 17 DEC Parameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly. Then start RESET command. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 B-9 Error Messages Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 ANZ (RightHand Byte) Description 19 HEX/ FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command. 19 DEC No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 470. No RESET was performed after an error message after which a RESET must be the next command. Start RESET command. 20 HEX/ Synchronization error between ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47 20 DEC The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams got out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable. BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. Start RESET command. 21 HEX/ ASM 470 has performed a startup. 21 DEC There may be a problem with the plug-in contact of the ASM 470 in the S7-300. 1 BH/ 27D1 Supply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable. Interference pulse DEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. Start RESET command. The data field (i.e., number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the end of DATDB is less than the length given in the write command (DR 4 in BEDB). Exception: DATDB consists of 256 data words (DW 0 to DW 255). DAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length. Make DAT-Z smaller. Reduce length of read/write data. Start RESET command. 1 B-10 Can only occur with FB 47 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Error Messages B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240 The error indications (ANZ) of FB 240 are located in data word DW 2 of the BEDB. The MOBY errors listed in table B-1 are located in the left-hand byte of the data word (DL 2). Internal FB errors are located in the right-hand byte of the data word (DR 2). The red LED does not flash for these FB 240 error messages. The contents of the byte are specified in binary format, in hexadecimal format (H) and as fixed point numbers (D). Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 ANZ (RightHand Byte) 00000010 (02H/02D) Description Illegal command code or command parameter was entered. Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly as specified in the command description. 00000110 (06H/06D) The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical. Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small. Parameterize master module correctly. 00000111 (07H/07D) The received acknowledgment is too long. Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (i.e., less than 32 bytes). Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long. Parameterize master module correctly. 00001000 (08H/08D) The parameterized length of the user data of the read/write command and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical. Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small. Parameterize master module correctly. 00001001 (09H/09D) The length of the received user data is too long. Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (i.e., less than 32 bytes). Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long. Parameterize master module correctly. 00010001 (11H/17D) The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly or the parameterization in the EPROM of IM 308-B is wrong. Parameterize FB 240 correctly. Parameterize master module correctly. Check the “ADR” parameter in particular. Then start RESET command. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 B-11 Error Messages Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 ANZ (RightHand Byte) 00010011 (13H/19D) Description FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permitted as the next command. No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 450. No RESET was performed after an error message which requires a RESET as the next command. Start RESET command. 00010100 (14H/20D) Synchronization error between ASM 450 and FB 240 The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams got out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable. Start RESET command. 00010101 (15H/21D) The ASM 450 has performed a startup or a PROFIBUS-DP bus error has occurred. Possible problem with the ASM 450’s plug-in contacts in the module rack B-12 Supply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable. Interference pulse on the reset input of base connector X1 PROFIBUS-DP error occurred (e.g., bus connection interrupted) Start RESET command. MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 ASCII Table MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 C C-1 ASCII Table C-2 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Index Numbers 6AW5 450-4BX00-0K, 6-26, A-1 6AW5 450-4BX00-1K, 6-26, A-1 6AW5 451-....3, 7-21 6AW5 451-6XX01-0K, A-2 6AW5 451-6XX01-1K, A-2 6AW5 451-8AU, 7-21 6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-11 6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-16 6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-16 6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0, 6-32, 7-26 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-32 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-40 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-40 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-40 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0, 6-47, 7-26 6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-5 6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-5 6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-16 6GT2 002-0CA00, 6-26 6GT2 002-0CB00, 6-26 6GT2 002-0CC00, 6-26 6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-32 6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-40 6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-5, 6-26, 6-32, 6-40, 7-4 6GT2 090-0A..., 3-55, 6-35, 6-61, 7-25 6GT2 090-0BA00, 7-26 6GT2 090-0BA10, 7-26 6GT2 090-0BB00, 7-26 6GT2 090-0BB10, 7-26 6GT2 090-0BC00, 6-32, 6-35, 7-26 6GT2 090-0HA00, 3-54 6GT2 090-0HB00, 6-60, 6-65, 6-70, 6-75, 7-7, 7-13, 7-26 6GT2 090-0KA00, 6-26, 7-5 6GT2 090-0LA00, 6-26, 7-5 6GT2 090-0LA10, 7-5 6GT2 090-0MA00, 7-7 6GT2 090-0MA10, 7-7 6GT2 090-0NA00, 7-26 6GT2 090-0UA00, 7-26 6GT2 091-0A..., 3-60, 7-25 6GT2 091-0C..., 7-25 6GT2 091-0D..., 3-60, 6-23, 7-25 6GT2 091-0E..., 3-61, 7-25 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 6GT2 091-1BH50, 7-7 6GT2 091-1C..., 3-61, 7-25 6GT2 091-1CH20, 6-32, 6-35, 7-25 6GT2 091-2A..., 3-60, 7-25 6GT2 091-2D..., 3-60, 7-25 6GT2 091-2E..., 3-61, 7-25 6GT2 097-3AA00-0DA1, 6-5, A-1 6GT2 097-3AA00-0DA2, 6-5, A-1 6GT2 097-3AA10-0EA1, A-1 6GT2 097-3AA10-0EA2, A-1 6GT2 097-3AB00-0DB1, 6-5, A-1 6GT2 097-3AB00-0DB2, 6-5, A-1 6GT2 097-3AC00-0DA1, 6-16, A-1 6GT2 097-3AC00-0DA2, 6-16, A-1 6GT2 097-3AC30-0DA1, 6-32, A-1 6GT2 097-3AC30-0DA2, 6-32, A-1 6GT2 097-3AF00-0DA1, 6-26, A-1 6GT2 097-3AF00-0DA2, 6-26, A-1 6GT2 097-3AK00-1EA1, 7-5, A-1 6GT2 097-3AK00-1EA2, 7-5, A-1 6GT2 097-3AL00-0DA1, 6-40, A-1 6GT2 097-3AL00-0DA2, 6-40, A-1 6GT2 097-3AL10-0DA1, 6-40, A-1 6GT2 097-3AL10-0DA2, 6-40, A-1 6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA1, 6-47, A-1 6GT2 097-3AM00-0DA2, 6-47, A-1 6GT2 190-0AA00, 4-8, 4-11, 7-27 6GT2 190-0AB00, 4-8, 4-11, 7-27 6GT2 300-0AA00, 4-4 6GT2 300-0BB00, 4-8 6GT2 300-0CD00, 4-12 6GT2 300-0CE00, 4-17 6GT2 301-0AA00, 5-3 6GT2 301-0AB00, 5-7 6GT2 301-0CA00, 5-11 6GT2 301-0FC00, 5-15 6GT2 301-0FD00, 5-19 6GT2 301-2BB00, 5-24, 6-47 6GT2 302-2CE00, 6-47 6GT2 302-2EE00, 6-47 6GT2 303-0AA00, 7-17 6GT2 303-1AA00, 7-17 6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-17 6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-17 6GT2 305-0AA00, 6-65 Index-1 Index 6GT2 305-0AB00, 6-70 6GT2 305-0CA00, 6-75 6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-17 6GT2 390-0AA00, 4-4, 4-6, 7-27 6GT2 390-0BA00, 6-47, 7-27 6GT2 390-1AA00, 6-65, 6-70, 6-75, 7-26 6GT2 390-1AB00, 6-47, 7-26 6GT2 391-0B..., 3-62, 6-47, 7-25 6GT2 391-1AH50, 3-62, 5-24, 6-46, 6-47, 7-25 6GT2 391-1BN25, 3-63, 5-24, 6-47, 7-25 6GT2 391-1DH50, 3-64, 6-60, 6-65, 6-70, 6-75, 7-13, 7-25 6GT2 397-6AB00-0DA1, A-2 6GT2 397-6AB00-0DA2, A-2 6GT2 491-1HH50, 6-46, 6-47, 7-9, 7-25 6GT2 494-0AA00, 3-56, 6-46, 6-47, 7-9, 7-26 A Acquisition station ES 030-K Features/layout, 7-19 Ordering data, 7-21 Technical data, 7-22 Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-51 Amount of data, transmitted based on MDS speed, 3-13 ASM 400 Address settings, 6-9 Function block FB 250, 6-7 Layout and functions, 6-3 Ordering data, 6-5 Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-8 Settings on the channel module, 6-10 SIMATIC S5 configuration, 6-11 Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-9 Technical data, 6-6 ASM 410 Configuration in ET 100U/200U, 6-19 Layout and function, 6-15 Ordering data, 6-16 Setting the operating mode, 6-21 Slots in PLC, 6-18 Technical data, 6-17 Wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-23 Index-2 ASM 420 Application area, 6-24 Assignment of base connector X1, 6-27 Layout and functions, 6-24 Ordering data, 6-26 Possible installation, 6-24 Setting operating mode, 6-28 Technical data, 6-27 ASM 450 Dimensions, 6-36 Ordering data, 6-32 Pin allocation, 6-37 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance, 6-38 SLG connection technique, 6-34 Technical data, 6-32 ASM 470 FC 47 function, 6-44 Layout and functions, 6-39 Ordering data, 6-40 Technical data, 6-41 Wiring to the SLG, 6-43 ASM 724/ASM 754 Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-51 Data structure of the MOBY E data memory with SIM, 6-53 Dimensions , 6-51 Field data, 6-55 Ordering data, 6-47 Pin assignment and switches, 6-49 Technical data, 6-48 B Basic rules on EMC, 3-49 C C-library CCT32, 7-4 MOBY API, 7-4 Cable configuration, 3-55 Cables, shielding of, 3-47 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 Index CCT32, 7-4 Chemical resistance of the mobile data memories, 3-32 Communication Between ASM and user program, 3-8 Between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS, 3-7 Concept of shielding, 3-51 Connection cables, 3-60 E EMC guidelines, 3-35 Equipotential bonding, 3-44 MOBY STG E hand-held terminal Hardware, 7-16 Ordering data, 7-17 Setup and function, 7-14 System prerequisites, 7-15 Technical data, 7-17 MOBY wide-range power supply Connector assignment of 24 V output, 7-10 Dimensions, 7-11 Ordering data, 7-9 Technical data, 7-9 Module rack BGT 4/BGT 8 Features, 7-5 Ordering data, 7-5 Technical data, 7-6 F Field data, 3-11 M MDS E600 Dimensions, 4-6 Field data, 4-5 Metal-free space, 4-7 Ordering data, 4-4 Technical data, 4-4 MDS E611 Dimensions, 4-9 Field data, 4-9 Metal-free space, 4-10 Ordering data, 4-8 Technical data, 4-8 MDS E623 Field data, 4-13 Metal-free space, 4-14 Mounting, 4-15 Ordering data, 4-12 Technical data, 4-12 MDS E624 Dimensions, 4-18 Field data, 4-18 Metal-free space, 4-19 Ordering data, 4-17 Technical data, 4-17 Metal-free area, 3-17 Flush mounting of MDS on metal, 3-17 Flush mounting of SLG/SLA in metal, 3-22 Mounting of MDS on metal, 3-17 MOBY API, 7-4 MOBY Software, 7-2 Ordering data, 7-4 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 O Ordering data Adapter floor plate, 7-27 Descriptions, A-1 Manuals, A-2 MDS mounting, 7-27 Plug connectors, 7-26 Plug-in lines, 7-25 Power pack, 7-26 Programming guides, A-2 P Plastic housing for ASM Ordering data, 7-7 Technical data, 7-7 Plug connector assignment, 3-57 S SIM 70 ANT 0 Definition of distance D, 6-68 Dimensions, 6-68 Metal-free space, 6-69 Ordering data, 6-65 Technical data, 6-65 Transmission window, 6-69 SIM 70 ANT 1 Definition of distance D, 6-74 Dimensions, 6-74 Metal-free space, 6-73 Ordering data, 6-70 Technical data, 6-70 Transmission window, 6-72 Index-3 Index SIM 72 Definition of distance D, 6-79 Dimensions, 6-79 Metal-free space, 6-78 Ordering data, 6-75 Technical data, 6-75 Transmission window, 6-77 SLA 71 Definition of distance D, 5-27 Dimensions , 5-27 Field data, 5-25 Metal-free space, 5-26 Ordering data, 5-24 Technical data, 5-24 Transmission window, 5-26 SLG 70 ANT 0 Definition of distance D, 5-6 Dimensions, 5-6 Field data, 5-4 Metal-free space, 5-5 Ordering data, 5-3 Technical data, 5-3 Transmission window, 5-5 SLG 70 ANT 1 Definition of distance D, 5-10 Dimensions, 5-10 Field data, 5-8 Metal-free space, 5-9 Ordering data, 5-7 Technical data, 5-7 Transmission window, 5-9 SLG 72 Definition of distance D, 5-13 Dimensions, 5-13 Field data, 5-12 Metal-free space, 5-14 Ordering data, 5-11 Technical data, 5-11 Transmission window, 5-14 Index-4 SLG 75 ANT 12 Definition of distance D, 5-18 Dimensions , 5-18 Field data, 5-17 Metal-free space, 5-17 Ordering data, 5-15 Technical data, 5-15 Transmission window, 5-17 SLG 75 ANT 30 Definition of distance D, 5-22 Dimensions, 5-23 Field data, 5-21 Metal-free space, 5-22 Ordering data, 5-19 Technical data, 5-19 Transmission window, 5-21 Supplementary power pack for SLG, 3-56 T Transmission window, 3-3 Effects of metal, 3-24 Reduction of metallic effects, 3-29 Transmit period of the MDS, 3-6 W Wide-range plug connector power pack Ordering data, 7-13 Technical data, 7-12 MOBY E Manual on Configuration, Installation and Service ( ) J31069-D0105-U001-A4-7618 TO: Siemens AG A&D SE ES4 PO Box 2355 D-90713 Fuerth FROM: Your name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your company: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ City: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Telephone:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please tick your branch. Automotive industry Pharmaceutics industry Chemical industry Plastics processing Electrical industry Paper industry Foodstuffs Textiles industry Process control technology Transportation industry Mechanical engineering Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Petrochemistry Remarks/Suggestions Your remarks and suggestions help us to improve the quality of our documentation. Please complete this questionnaire as soon as you have time, and return it to Siemens. Title of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Order number of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please enter your personal evaluation from 1 (good) to 5 (poor). 1. Do the contents of this manual meet your requirements ? 2. Is it easy to find the information you need ? 3. Is the information written in an easy-to-understand manner ? 4. Does the amount of technical detail meet your requirements ? 5. What is your opinion of the figures and tables ? If you encountered concrete problems, please use this space to explain. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Mobile data memory for industrial applications
- Designed for harsh environments
- Various mounting options (pallets, containers, etc.)
- Read/write devices for data access
- Interface module for PLC/control system connection
- Data tracking, process control, and data collection capabilities
Frequently asked questions
The MOBY E system is a mobile data system, designed for various industrial applications. It can be used to track objects, control processes, or collect data in harsh environments.
The MOBY E system consists of a mobile data memory (MDS), a read/write device (SLG/SLA), and an interface module (ASM).
The MOBY E system can be installed in various places due to its rugged design. It can be installed on pallets, containers, and other objects, or on conveyor belts.
The MOBY E system connects to a PLC or other control system using an interface module (ASM), which provides the necessary interfaces.
The MOBY E system can store a variety of data, such as serial numbers, production dates, and other relevant information.